FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center

V100R021C10

User Manual (02116410, 02116411,

021164112)

Issue 04
Date 2023-10-31

HUAWEI DIGITAL POWER TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 2023. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei
Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features
described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise
specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are
provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Digital Power Antuoshan Headquarters

Futian, Shenzhen 518043

People's Republic of China

Website: https://digitalpower.huawei.com

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. i

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) About This Document

About This Document

Purpose
This document describes the FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center (smart
module for short) in terms of its installation, commissioning, operation, and
maintenance.

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
● Hardware installation engineers
● Technical support engineers
● Commissioning engineers
● Maintenance engineers

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk which, if not

avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if not

avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal
injury.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) About This Document

Symbol Description

Supplements the important information in the main text.

NOTE is used to address information not related to
personal injury, equipment damage, and environment
deterioration.

Change History
Issue Date Description

04 2023-10-31 Updated section

"iManager-M."

03 2022-08-20 Updated section "Power-

On Commissioning."

02 2022-02-25 Updated section

"(Optional) Installing a
Camera."

01 2021-07-15 This issue is the first

official release.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. iii
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) Contents

Contents

About This Document................................................................................................................ ii

1 Safety Information.................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 Personal Safety.........................................................................................................................................................................2
1.2 Electrical Safety........................................................................................................................................................................ 4
1.3 Environmental Requirements.............................................................................................................................................. 8
1.4 Mechanical Safety.................................................................................................................................................................10
1.5 Equipment Safety.................................................................................................................................................................. 15
1.5.1 UPS Safety............................................................................................................................................................................16
1.5.2 Cooling System Safety..................................................................................................................................................... 17
1.5.3 Battery Safety..................................................................................................................................................................... 17

2 Overview................................................................................................................................. 23
2.1 Positioning............................................................................................................................................................................... 23
2.2 Features.................................................................................................................................................................................... 25
2.3 Typical Application Scenarios and Configurations.....................................................................................................26
2.3.1 Typical Scenarios................................................................................................................................................................ 26
2.3.2 Typical Configurations..................................................................................................................................................... 26

3 System Architecture..............................................................................................................29
3.1 Structural System.................................................................................................................................................................. 29
3.2 Power Supply and Distribution System......................................................................................................................... 30
3.2.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................................................... 30
3.2.2 Power Distribution Subrack........................................................................................................................................... 31
3.2.3 Transformer......................................................................................................................................................................... 31
3.2.4 UPS2000-H-6 kVA............................................................................................................................................................. 32
3.2.5 rPDU....................................................................................................................................................................................... 38
3.2.5.1 Non-intelligent rPDU.................................................................................................................................................... 38
3.2.5.2 Intelligent rPDU.............................................................................................................................................................. 39
3.2.6 Lithium Battery ESM-48100B1......................................................................................................................................39
3.3 Cooling System...................................................................................................................................................................... 40
3.3.1 Application Conditions..................................................................................................................................................... 41
3.3.2 Technical Specifications................................................................................................................................................... 41
3.4 Management System........................................................................................................................................................... 42
3.4.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................................................... 42

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) Contents

3.4.2 System Functions............................................................................................................................................................... 43

3.4.2.1 Monitoring........................................................................................................................................................................ 43
3.4.2.2 App View........................................................................................................................................................................... 43
3.4.2.3 Alarm.................................................................................................................................................................................. 44
3.4.2.4 Historical Data Query................................................................................................................................................... 44
3.4.2.5 Linkage Control...............................................................................................................................................................44
3.4.3 Key Hardware Devices..................................................................................................................................................... 44
3.4.3.1 ECC800-Pro....................................................................................................................................................................... 44
3.4.3.1.1 Product Configuration............................................................................................................................................... 45
3.4.3.1.2 Main Control Module................................................................................................................................................ 46
3.4.3.2 Environment Monitoring System.............................................................................................................................. 54
3.4.3.2.1 Electrode Water Sensor............................................................................................................................................ 54
3.4.3.2.2 T/H Sensor.................................................................................................................................................................... 55
3.4.3.2.3 Smoke Detector........................................................................................................................................................... 56
3.4.3.3 Video Management System....................................................................................................................................... 57
3.4.3.3.1 Camera........................................................................................................................................................................... 57
3.4.3.3.2 IVS1800.......................................................................................................................................................................... 58
3.4.3.4 PAD..................................................................................................................................................................................... 60
3.4.3.5 Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock.................................................................................................................................... 61
3.4.3.6 Door Status Switch........................................................................................................................................................ 63
3.4.3.7 (Optional) UIM20A Expansion Module.................................................................................................................. 64
3.4.3.8 WiFi Module.....................................................................................................................................................................67
3.4.3.9 WLAN Antenna............................................................................................................................................................... 68
3.4.4 NetEco................................................................................................................................................................................... 69
3.4.4.1 System Overview............................................................................................................................................................ 69
3.4.4.2 Server................................................................................................................................................................................. 70
3.4.4.3 LAN Switch....................................................................................................................................................................... 70
3.4.5 iManager-M......................................................................................................................................................................... 70
3.5 Surge Protection and Grounding System..................................................................................................................... 71
3.5.1 Surge Protection Solution............................................................................................................................................... 71
3.5.2 Grounding Solution........................................................................................................................................................... 71
3.6 Fire Extinguishing System.................................................................................................................................................. 71
3.7 Integrated Cabling System................................................................................................................................................ 72

4 Installation Guide..................................................................................................................74
4.1 Installation Preparations.................................................................................................................................................... 74
4.1.1 Tools and Instruments..................................................................................................................................................... 74
4.1.2 Installation Environment Check................................................................................................................................... 77
4.1.3 Site Equipment Preparation........................................................................................................................................... 79
4.1.4 Installation Scenarios....................................................................................................................................................... 80
4.1.5 Configuration Scenario.................................................................................................................................................... 83
4.1.6 Personnel Requirements................................................................................................................................................. 86
4.2 Hardware Installation.......................................................................................................................................................... 86

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. v

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) Contents

4.2.1 Cabinet Transportation and Unpacking..................................................................................................................... 86

4.2.2 Installing a Cabinet........................................................................................................................................................... 90
4.2.3 Installing Smart Cooling Product Components....................................................................................................... 92
4.2.3.1 Installing a Drainage Pipe for the Smart Cooling Product.............................................................................. 92
4.2.3.2 Installing Remote T/H Sensors for the Smart Cooling Product..................................................................... 93
4.2.4 Installing Power Supply and Distribution Devices................................................................................................. 94
4.2.4.1 Installing Lithium Batteries.........................................................................................................................................94
4.2.4.2 (Optional) Installing Busbars..................................................................................................................................... 96
4.2.4.3 Installing rPDUs.............................................................................................................................................................. 97
4.2.5 Installing Monitoring Devices........................................................................................................................................99
4.2.5.1 Device Layout.................................................................................................................................................................. 99
4.2.5.2 Installing the SIM Card and Antenna................................................................................................................... 100
4.2.5.3 Installing a PAD............................................................................................................................................................ 101
4.2.5.4 Installing Cabinet T/H Sensors................................................................................................................................ 105
4.2.5.5 Installing an Electrode Water Sensor................................................................................................................... 106
4.2.5.6 (Optional) Installing a UIM20A Expansion Module........................................................................................ 106
4.2.5.7 (Optional) Installing a Server..................................................................................................................................107
4.2.5.8 (Optional) Installing a Camera............................................................................................................................... 109
4.2.5.9 (Optional) Installing a LAN Switch....................................................................................................................... 113
4.2.5.10 Installing an IVS1800............................................................................................................................................... 114
4.2.6 (Optional) Installing a Rack-mounted Integrated Fire Extinguishing Module.......................................... 118
4.3 Cable Routing...................................................................................................................................................................... 119
4.3.1 System Cabling Rules.....................................................................................................................................................119
4.3.2 Grounding the Smart Module.....................................................................................................................................123
4.3.3 Cable Connections to the Power Supply and Distribution System................................................................ 124
4.3.3.1 Cable Routing Description........................................................................................................................................ 125
4.3.3.2 Connecting Cabinet Input Power Cables............................................................................................................. 126
4.3.3.3 Connecting rPDU Cables........................................................................................................................................... 127
4.3.3.3.1 Connecting rPDU Power Cables.......................................................................................................................... 127
4.3.3.3.2 Connecting rPDU Signal Cables.......................................................................................................................... 130
4.3.3.4 Connecting Lithium Battery Cables....................................................................................................................... 131
4.3.4 Connecting IVS Cables...................................................................................................................................................133
4.4 Verifying the Installation................................................................................................................................................. 135

5 Power-On Commissioning................................................................................................. 138

5.1 Power-On Commissioning for the Power Supply and Distribution System................................................... 138
5.1.1 UPS Power-On Commissioning.................................................................................................................................. 139
5.1.1.1 Checking Before Power-On...................................................................................................................................... 139
5.1.1.2 UPS Startup Method................................................................................................................................................... 139
5.1.1.3 Starting a UPS...............................................................................................................................................................141
5.1.1.4 UPS Shutdown Method............................................................................................................................................. 142
5.1.1.5 Shutting Down a UPS.................................................................................................................................................142
5.1.1.6 Cold-Starting the UPS Using Batteries (Single UPS).......................................................................................142

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) Contents

5.1.2 Connecting the Lithium Battery Supply.................................................................................................................. 143

5.2 Power-On Commissioning for the Cooling System.................................................................................................144
5.2.1 Powering on Devices...................................................................................................................................................... 144
5.2.2 Initial Configuration....................................................................................................................................................... 144
5.2.2.1 Preparations and Management System Login.................................................................................................. 144
5.2.2.1.1 Preparations and WebUI Login........................................................................................................................... 145
5.2.2.1.2 Preparations and App Login................................................................................................................................. 146
5.2.2.1.3 Initial Startup Password Authentication...........................................................................................................149
5.2.2.1.4 (Optional) iManager-M Service Access............................................................................................................ 150
5.2.2.2 Performing Initial Configuration............................................................................................................................ 151
5.2.3 Commissioning the Cooling System......................................................................................................................... 153
5.3 Management System Power-On Commissioning.................................................................................................... 155
5.3.1 How Do I Set the Date and Time?............................................................................................................................ 155
5.3.2 Adding a Southbound Device..................................................................................................................................... 155
5.3.3 Creating a Smart Module Plan View........................................................................................................................ 156
5.3.4 Commissioning Sensors................................................................................................................................................ 158
5.3.4.1 Setting and Adding a Smoke Detector.................................................................................................................158
5.3.4.2 Commissioning a T/H Sensor.................................................................................................................................. 159
5.3.4.3 Commissioning an Electrode Water Sensor ...................................................................................................... 161
5.3.5 Commissioning a Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock.................................................................................................. 162
5.3.6 Commissioning a Cabinet Door Status Sensor..................................................................................................... 166
5.3.7 Commissioning an Intelligent rPDU......................................................................................................................... 167
5.3.8 Configuring Event Notification................................................................................................................................... 168
5.3.9 Linkage Control................................................................................................................................................................176
5.3.9.1 Linking the Smoke Alarm with Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock Open........................................................ 177
5.3.9.2 Linking the Fire Control with Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock Open............................................................178
5.3.9.3 Linking the Emergency Ventilation with Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock Open...................................... 179
5.3.10 Commissioning a Camera (LAN Switch Networking Scenario)....................................................................180
5.3.10.1 Commissioning a C3220 Camera......................................................................................................................... 180
5.3.10.2 Commissioning a C3220 Camera (SD Card Configured)............................................................................. 187
5.3.11 (Optional) Commissioning the IVS1800............................................................................................................... 191
5.3.11.1 Setting Parameters on the IVS1800 WebUI..................................................................................................... 191
5.3.11.2 Setting Parameters on the iClient S100............................................................................................................ 197
5.3.11.3 How Do I Troubleshoot the Failure to Find a Camera on the iClient S100?........................................ 204
5.3.12 (Optional) NetEco Management............................................................................................................................ 211
5.3.12.1 Connecting a Communications Cable................................................................................................................ 211
5.3.12.2 Setting NetEco Parameters.................................................................................................................................... 213
5.3.12.3 Obtaining the NetEco Software License............................................................................................................214
5.3.12.4 Obtaining the Adapter Software Installation Packages...............................................................................215
5.3.12.5 Powering On a Server.............................................................................................................................................. 216
5.3.12.6 Logging In to the NetEco Client...........................................................................................................................216
5.3.12.7 Loading the NetEco Software License............................................................................................................... 217

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. vii
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) Contents

5.3.12.8 Installing NE Adapters............................................................................................................................................. 218

5.3.12.9 Adding a Management Domain.......................................................................................................................... 218
5.3.12.9.1 General Operation: Adding a Management Domain................................................................................ 218
5.3.12.9.2 Example: Adding a Smart Module................................................................................................................... 219
5.3.12.10 Creating an ECC800-Pro on the NetEco..........................................................................................................222
5.3.13 (Optional) Third-party NMS Management (over SNMP).............................................................................. 222
5.3.13.1 Connecting a Communications Cable................................................................................................................ 222
5.3.13.2 Setting SNMP Management Parameters.......................................................................................................... 223
5.3.14 (Optional) iManager-M.............................................................................................................................................. 225
5.3.14.1 Connecting a Device (Through the App).......................................................................................................... 225
5.3.14.1.1 Installing the NetEco App................................................................................................................................... 225
5.3.14.1.2 (Optional) Replacing the App Certificate on a Mobile Device.............................................................. 226
5.3.14.1.3 Registering a NetEco App Account.................................................................................................................. 227
5.3.14.1.4 Logging In to the NetEco App........................................................................................................................... 227
5.3.14.1.5 Connecting a Device............................................................................................................................................. 228
5.3.14.2 Logging In to and Logging Out of the NetEco WebUI................................................................................ 229
5.3.14.2.1 Operating Environment Requirements........................................................................................................... 230
5.3.14.2.2 Logging In to the NetEco WebUI..................................................................................................................... 232
5.3.14.2.3 Logging Out of the NetEco WebUI................................................................................................................. 233
5.3.14.3 FAQs About iManager-M........................................................................................................................................ 233
5.3.14.3.1 How Do I Enable or Disable the Message Push Function....................................................................... 233
5.3.14.3.2 What Do I Do If the Browser Displays a Certificate Error or Security Risk....................................... 235
5.4 Fire Extinguishing System Power-On Commissioning........................................................................................... 238

6 O&M....................................................................................................................................... 240
6.1 Routine Maintenance........................................................................................................................................................ 240
6.1.1 Monthly Maintenance................................................................................................................................................... 240
6.1.2 Quarterly Maintenance................................................................................................................................................. 245
6.1.3 Yearly Maintenance........................................................................................................................................................ 252
6.2 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................................................................. 262
6.2.1 Power Supply and Distribution System Troubleshooting.................................................................................. 262
6.2.2 Management System Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................265
6.3 Alarm References................................................................................................................................................................ 267
6.4 Parts Replacement............................................................................................................................................................. 268
6.4.1 Replacing Structural System Components............................................................................................................. 269
6.4.1.1 Replacing a Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock......................................................................................................... 269
6.4.1.2 Replacing a Gas Spring.............................................................................................................................................. 270
6.4.2 Replacing Power Supply and Distribution System Components.................................................................... 271
6.4.2.1 Replacing a Surge Protection Module.................................................................................................................. 271
6.4.2.2 Replacing a Fuse.......................................................................................................................................................... 273
6.4.2.3 Replacing an rPDU...................................................................................................................................................... 274
6.4.2.4 Replacing a Transformer........................................................................................................................................... 274
6.4.2.5 Replacing a UPS2000-H............................................................................................................................................ 277

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. viii
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) Contents

6.4.2.6 Replacing a Lithium Battery.................................................................................................................................... 278

6.4.3 Replacing Cooling System Components..................................................................................................................279
6.4.3.1 Replacing an Internal Circulation Fan.................................................................................................................. 279
6.4.3.2 Replacing a PSU, Rectifier, or Main Control Module....................................................................................... 282
6.4.3.3 Replacing an NTC Temperature Sensor............................................................................................................... 284
6.4.3.4 Replacing a Low Pressure Sensor........................................................................................................................... 285
6.4.3.5 Replacing a Contactor................................................................................................................................................ 287
6.4.3.6 Replacing an EEV and Coil....................................................................................................................................... 288
6.4.3.7 Replacing an External Circulation Fan................................................................................................................. 290
6.4.3.8 Replacing a Compressor............................................................................................................................................ 292
6.4.3.9 Replacing a High Pressure Sensor......................................................................................................................... 295
6.4.3.10 Replacing a Pneumatic Switch............................................................................................................................. 297
6.4.4 Replacing Management System Components...................................................................................................... 299
6.4.4.1 Replacing an ECC800-Pro Main Control Module.............................................................................................. 299
6.4.4.2 Replacing an ECC800-Pro Antenna....................................................................................................................... 301
6.4.4.3 Replacing a SIM Card................................................................................................................................................. 301
6.4.4.4 Replacing a Camera.................................................................................................................................................... 303
6.4.4.5 Replacing an IVS1800................................................................................................................................................ 304
6.4.4.6 Replacing a Hard Disk for the IVS1800............................................................................................................... 305
6.4.4.7 Replacing a T/H Sensor (33010516)..................................................................................................................... 308
6.4.4.8 Replacing a Smoke Detector................................................................................................................................... 308
6.4.4.9 Replacing an Electrode Water Sensor.................................................................................................................. 309
6.4.4.10 Replacing a Door Status Sensor........................................................................................................................... 309

7 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................310
A Equipment Derating Coefficients....................................................................................312
B Acronyms and Abbreviations........................................................................................... 313

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 1 Safety Information

1 Safety Information

Statement
Before transporting, storing, installing, operating, using, and/or maintaining
the equipment, read this document, strictly follow the instructions provided
herein, and follow all the safety instructions on the equipment and in this
document. In this document, "equipment" refers to the products, software,
components, spare parts, and/or services related to this document; "the Company"
refers to the manufacturer (producer), seller, and/or service provider of the
equipment; "you" refers to the entity that transports, stores, installs, operates,
uses, and/or maintains the equipment.

The Danger, Warning, Caution, and Notice statements described in this

document do not cover all the safety precautions. You also need to comply with
relevant international, national, or regional standards and industry practices. The
Company shall not be liable for any consequences that may arise due to
violations of safety requirements or safety standards concerning the design,
production, and usage of the equipment.

The equipment shall be used in an environment that meets the design

specifications. Otherwise, the equipment may be faulty, malfunctioning, or
damaged, which is not covered under the warranty. The Company shall not be
liable for any property loss, personal injury, or even death caused thereby.

Comply with applicable laws, regulations, standards, and specifications during

transportation, storage, installation, operation, use, and maintenance.

Do not perform reverse engineering, decompilation, disassembly, adaptation,

implantation, or other derivative operations on the equipment software. Do not
study the internal implementation logic of the equipment, obtain the source code
of the equipment software, violate intellectual property rights, or disclose any of
the performance test results of the equipment software.

The Company shall not be liable for any of the following circumstances or
their consequences:

● Equipment damage due to force majeure such as earthquakes, floods,

volcanic eruptions, debris flows, lightning strikes, fires, wars, armed conflicts,
typhoons, hurricanes, tornadoes, and extreme weather conditions
● Operation beyond the conditions specified in this document

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 1

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 1 Safety Information

● Installation or use in environments that do not comply with international,

national, or regional standards
● Installation or use by unqualified personnel
● Failure to follow the operation instructions and safety precautions on the
product and in the document
● Unauthorized modifications to the product or software code or removal of the
product
● Damage caused during transportation by you or a third party authorized by
you
● Storage conditions that do not meet the requirements specified in the product
document
● Failure to comply with local laws, regulations, or related standards due to the
materials and tools prepared by you
● Damage caused by your or a third party's negligence, intentional breach,
gross negligence, or improper operations or damage not caused by the
Company

1.1 Personal Safety

DANGER

Do not work with power on during installation. Do not install or remove a cable
with power on. Transient contact between the core of the cable and the conductor
will generate electric arcs or sparks, which may cause a fire or personal injury.

DANGER

Non-standard and improper operations on the energized equipment may cause

fire or electric shocks, resulting in property damage, personal injury, or even death.

DANGER

Before operations, remove conductive objects such as watches, bracelets, bangles,

rings, and necklaces to prevent electric shocks.

DANGER

During operations, use dedicated insulated tools to prevent electric shocks or short
circuits. The insulation and voltage resistance must comply with local laws,
regulations, standards, and specifications.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 2

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 1 Safety Information

WARNING

During operations, wear personal protective equipment such as protective

clothing, insulated shoes, goggles, safety helmets, and insulated gloves.

Figure 1-1 Personal protective equipment

General Requirements
● Do not stop protective devices. Pay attention to the warnings, cautions, and
related precautionary measures in this document and on the equipment.
● If there is a likelihood of personal injury or equipment damage during
operations, immediately stop, report the case to the supervisor, and take
feasible protective measures.
● Do not power on the equipment before it is installed or confirmed by
professionals.
● Do not touch the power supply equipment directly or with conductors such as
damp objects. Before touching any conductor surface or terminal, measure
the voltage at the contact point to ensure that there is no risk of electric
shock.
● Do not touch a running fan with your hands, components, screws, tools, or
boards. Otherwise, personal injury or equipment damage may occur.
● In the case of a fire, immediately leave the building or the equipment area
and activate the fire alarm or call emergency services. Do not enter the
affected building or equipment area under any circumstances.

Personnel Requirements
● Only professionals and trained personnel are allowed to operate the
equipment.
– Professionals: personnel who are familiar with the working principles and
structure of the equipment, trained or experienced in equipment
operations and are clear of the sources and degree of various potential
hazards in equipment installation, operation, maintenance
– Trained personnel: personnel who are trained in technology and safety,
have required experience, are aware of possible hazards on themselves in

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 3

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 1 Safety Information

certain operations, and are able to take protective measures to minimize

the hazards on themselves and other people
● Personnel who plan to install or maintain the equipment must receive
adequate training, be able to correctly perform all operations, and understand
all necessary safety precautions and local relevant standards.
● Only qualified professionals or trained personnel are allowed to install,
operate, and maintain the equipment.
● Only qualified professionals are allowed to remove safety facilities and inspect
the equipment.
● Personnel who will perform special tasks such as electrical operations,
working at heights, and operations of special equipment must possess the
required local qualifications.
● Only authorized professionals are allowed to replace the equipment or
components (including software).
● Only personnel who need to work on the equipment are allowed to access
the equipment.

1.2 Electrical Safety

DANGER

Before connecting cables, ensure that the equipment is intact. Otherwise, electric
shocks or fires may occur.

DANGER

Non-standard and improper operations may result in fire or electric shocks.

DANGER

Prevent foreign matter from entering the equipment during operations. Otherwise,
equipment damage, load power derating, power failure, or personal injury may
occur.

WARNING

For the equipment that needs to be grounded, install the ground cable first when
installing the equipment and remove the ground cable last when removing the
equipment.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 4

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 1 Safety Information

CAUTION

Do not route cables near the air intake or exhaust vents of the equipment.

CAUTION

Do not directly connect aluminum cables to prevent electrochemical corrosion of

copper and aluminum.

CAUTION

Stay away from the equipment when preparing cables to prevent cable scraps
from entering the equipment. Cable scraps may cause sparks and result in
personal injury and equipment damage.

General Requirements
● Follow the procedures described in the document for installation, operation,
and maintenance. Do not reconstruct or alter the equipment, add
components, or change the installation sequence without permission.
● Install temporary fences or warning ropes and hang "No Entry" signs around
the operation area to keep unauthorized personnel away from the area.
● Before installing or removing power cables, turn off the switches of the
equipment and its upstream and downstream switches.
● If any liquid is detected inside the equipment, disconnect the power supply
immediately and do not use the equipment.
● Before performing operations on the equipment, check that all tools meet the
requirements and record the tools. After the operations are complete, collect
all of the tools to prevent them from being left inside the equipment.
● Before installing power cables, check that cable labels are correct and cable
terminals are insulated.
● When installing the equipment, use a torque tool of a proper measurement
range to tighten the screws. When using a wrench to tighten the screws,
ensure that the wrench does not tilt and the torque error does not exceed
10% of the specified value.
● Ensure that bolts are tightened with a torque tool and marked in red and blue
after double-check. Installation personnel mark tightened bolts in blue.
Quality inspection personnel confirm that the bolts are tightened and then
mark them in red. (The marks must cross the edges of the bolts.)

● After the installation is complete, ensure that protective cases, insulation

tubes, and other necessary items for all electrical components are in position
to avoid electric shocks.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 5

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 1 Safety Information

● If the equipment has multiple inputs, disconnect all the inputs before
operating the equipment.
● Before maintaining a downstream electrical or power distribution device, turn
off the output switch on the power supply equipment.
● During equipment maintenance, attach "Do not switch on" labels near the
upstream and downstream switches or circuit breakers as well as warning
signs to prevent accidental connection. The equipment can be powered on
only after troubleshooting is complete.
● If fault diagnosis and troubleshooting need to be performed after power-off,
take the following safety measures: Disconnect the power supply. Check
whether the equipment is live. Install a ground cable. Hang warning signs and
set up fences.
● Check equipment connections periodically, ensuring that all screws are
securely tightened.
● Only qualified professionals can replace a damaged cable.
● Do not scrawl, damage, or block any labels or nameplates on the equipment.
Promptly replace labels that have worn out.
● Do not use solvents such as water, alcohol, or oil to clean electrical
components inside or outside of the equipment.
● Wear personal protective equipment and use dedicated insulated tools to
avoid electric shocks or short circuits.
● Do not use wet cloth to clean exposed copper bars or other conductive parts.

Grounding
● Ensure that the grounding impedance of the equipment complies with local
electrical standards.
● Ensure that the equipment is connected permanently to the protective
ground. Before operating the equipment, check its electrical connection to
ensure that it is reliably grounded.
● Ensure that the protective ground point of the equipment is reliably
connected to the ground screw of the metal enclosure (connection resistance:
≤ 0.1 ohms).
● Ensure that the ground resistance of the system for lightning protection is less
than or equal to 10 ohms.
● Do not operate the equipment in the absence of a properly installed ground
conductor.
● Do not damage the ground conductor.
● If high touch current may occur on the equipment, ground the protective
ground terminal on the equipment enclosure before connecting the power
supply; otherwise, electric shock as a result of touch current may occur.

Cabling
● When selecting, installing, and routing cables, follow local safety regulations
and rules.
● The flame spread rating of cables shall meet the UL 1581 VW-1 or IEC
60332-3-22 (ZB) or higher requirements.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 6

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 1 Safety Information

● When routing power cables, ensure that there is no coiling or twisting. Do not
join or weld power cables. If necessary, use a longer cable.
● Ensure that all cables are properly connected and insulated, and meet
specifications.
● Ensure that the slots and holes for routing cables are free from sharp edges,
and that the positions where cables are routed through pipes or cable holes
are equipped with cushion materials to prevent the cables from being
damaged by sharp edges or burrs.
● If a cable is connected to the cabinet from the top, bend the cable in a U
shape outside the cabinet and then route it into the cabinet.
● Ensure that cables of the same type are bound together neatly and straight
and that the cable sheath is intact. When routing cables of different types,
ensure that they are at least 30 mm away from each other.
● If the external conditions (such as the cable layout or ambient temperature)
change, verify the cable usage in accordance with the IEC-60364-5-52 or local
laws and regulations. For example, check that the current-carrying capacity
meets requirements.
● When routing cables, reserve at least 30 mm clearance between the cables
and heat-generating components or areas. This prevents deterioration or
damage to the cable insulation layer.
● When the temperature is low, violent impact or vibration may damage the
plastic cable sheathing. To ensure safety, comply with the following
requirements:
– Cables can be laid or installed only when the temperature is higher than
0°C. Handle cables with caution, especially at a low temperature.
– Cables stored at subzero temperatures must be stored at room
temperature for at least 24 hours before they are laid out.
● Do not perform any improper operations, for example, dropping cables
directly from a vehicle. Otherwise, the cable performance may deteriorate due
to cable damage, which affects the current-carrying capacity and temperature
rise.

ESD

NOTICE

The static electricity generated by human bodies may damage the electrostatic-
sensitive components on boards, for example, the large-scale integrated (LSI)
circuits.

● When touching the equipment and handling boards, modules with exposed
circuit boards, or application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs), observe ESD
protection regulations and wear ESD clothing and ESD gloves or a well-
grounded ESD wrist strap.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 7

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 1 Safety Information

Figure 1-2 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

● When holding a board or a module with exposed circuit boards, hold its edge
without touching any components. Do not touch the components with bare
hands.
● Package boards or modules with ESD packaging materials before storing or
transporting them.

1.3 Environmental Requirements

DANGER

Do not expose the equipment to flammable or explosive gas or smoke. Do not

perform any operation on the equipment in such environments.

DANGER

Do not store any flammable or explosive materials in the equipment area.

DANGER

Do not place the equipment near heat sources or fire sources, such as smoke,
candles, heaters, or other heating devices. Overheat may damage the equipment
or cause a fire.

WARNING

Install the equipment in an area far away from liquids. Do not install it under
areas prone to condensation, such as under water pipes and air exhaust vents, or
areas prone to water leakage, such as air conditioner vents, ventilation vents, or
feeder windows of the equipment room. Ensure that no liquid enters the
equipment to prevent faults or short circuits.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 8

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 1 Safety Information

WARNING

To prevent damage or fire due to high temperature, ensure that the ventilation
vents or heat dissipation systems are not obstructed or covered by other objects
while the equipment is running.

General Requirements
● Ensure that the equipment is stored in a clean, dry, and well ventilated area
with proper temperature and humidity and is protected from dust and
condensation.
● Keep the installation and operating environments of the equipment within the
allowed ranges. Otherwise, its performance and safety will be compromised.
● Do not install, use, or operate outdoor equipment and cables (including but
not limited to moving equipment, operating equipment and cables, inserting
connectors to or removing connectors from signal ports connected to outdoor
facilities, working at heights, performing outdoor installation, and opening
doors) in harsh weather conditions such as lightning, rain, snow, and level 6
or stronger wind.
● Do not install the equipment in an environment with direct sunlight, dust,
smoke, volatile or corrosive gases, infrared and other radiations, organic
solvents, or salty air.
● Do not install the equipment in an environment with conductive metal or
magnetic dust.
● Do not install the equipment in an area conducive to the growth of
microorganisms such as fungus or mildew.
● Do not install the equipment in an area with strong vibration, noise, or
electromagnetic interference.
● Ensure that the site complies with local laws, regulations, and related
standards.
● Ensure that the ground in the installation environment is solid, free from
spongy or soft soil, and not prone to subsidence. The site must not be located
in a low-lying land prone to water or snow accumulation, and the horizontal
level of the site must be above the highest water level of that area in history.
● Before opening doors during the installation, operation, and maintenance of
the equipment, clean up any water, ice, snow, or other foreign objects on the
top of the equipment to prevent foreign objects from falling into the
equipment.
● When installing the equipment, ensure that the installation surface is solid
enough to bear the weight of the equipment.
● Ensure that the equipment room provides good heat insulation, and that the
walls and floor are dampproof.
● Install protective devices at the door of the equipment room to prevent
rodents and insects from entering the room.
● All cable holes must be sealed. Seal the used cable holes with sealing putty.
Seal the unused cable holes with the caps delivered with the equipment. The
following figure shows the criteria for correct sealing with sealing putty.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 9

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 1 Safety Information

● After installing the equipment, remove idle packing materials such as cartons,
foam, plastics, and cable ties from the equipment area.

1.4 Mechanical Safety

DANGER

When working at heights, wear a safety helmet and safety harness or waist belt
and fasten it to a solid structure. Do not mount it on an insecure moveable object
or a metal object with sharp edges. Make sure that the hooks will not slide off.

WARNING

Ensure that all necessary tools are ready and inspected by a professional
organization. Do not use tools that have signs of scratches or fail to pass the
inspection or whose inspection validity period has expired. Ensure that the tools
are secure and not overloaded.

WARNING

Before installing equipment in a cabinet, ensure that the cabinet is securely

fastened with a balanced center of gravity. Otherwise, tipping or falling cabinets
may cause bodily injury and equipment damage.

WARNING

When pulling equipment out of a cabinet, be aware of unstable or heavy objects

in the cabinet to prevent injury.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 10

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 1 Safety Information

WARNING

Do not drill holes into the equipment. Doing so may affect the sealing and
electromagnetic interference shield performance of the equipment and damage
components or cables inside. Metal shavings from drilling may short-circuit boards
inside the equipment.

General Requirements
● Repaint any paint scratches caused during equipment transportation or
installation in a timely manner. Equipment with scratches cannot be exposed
for an extended period of time.
● Do not perform operations such as arc welding and cutting on the equipment
without evaluation by the Company.
● Do not install other devices on the top of the equipment without evaluation
by the Company.
● When performing operations above the equipment, take measures to protect
the equipment against damage.
● Use correct tools and operate them in the correct way.

Moving Heavy Objects

● Be cautious to prevent injury when moving heavy objects.

● If multiple persons need to move a heavy object together, determine the

manpower and work division with consideration of height and other
conditions to ensure that the weight is evenly distributed.
● If two persons or more move a heavy object together, ensure that the object
is lifted and landed simultaneously and moved at a uniform pace under the
supervision of one person.
● Wear personal protective gears such as protective gloves and shoes when
manually moving the equipment.
● To move an object by hand, approach the object, squat down, and then lift
the object slowly and stably by the force of the legs instead of your back. Do
not lift it suddenly or turn or twist your body.
● Move or lift the equipment by holding its handles or lower edges. Do not hold
the handles of modules that are installed in the equipment.
● Slowly lift a heavy object above your waist. Place the object on a workbench
that is half-waist high or any other appropriate place, adjust the positions of
your palms, and then lift it.
● Move a heavy object stably with balanced force at an even and low speed. Put
down the object stably and slowly to prevent any collision or drop that may
cause scratches on the surface of the equipment or damage to the
components and cables.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 11

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 1 Safety Information

● When moving a heavy object, be aware of the workbench, slope, staircase,

and slippery places. When moving a heavy object through a door, ensure that
the door is wide enough to move the object and avoid bumping or injury.
● When transferring a heavy object, move your feet instead of twisting your
waist. When lifting and transferring a heavy object, ensure that your feet
point to the target direction of movement.
● When transporting the equipment using a forklift truck, ensure that the forks
are properly positioned so that the equipment does not topple. Before moving
the equipment, secure it to the forklift truck using ropes. When moving the
equipment, assign dedicated personnel to take care of it.
● Choose sea or roads in good conditions for transportation. Do not transport
batteries by railway or air. Avoid tilt or jolt during transportation.
● When transporting a cabinet, ensure that its tilt angle meets the requirements
shown in the figure. The tilt angle α of a cabinet with packaging shall be less
than or equal to 15°. After the cabinet is unpacked, its tilt angle α shall be
less than or equal to 10°.

Working at Heights
● Any operations performed 2 meters or higher above the ground must be
supervised properly.
● Only trained and qualified personnel are allowed to work at heights.
● Do not work at heights when steel pipes are wet or other risky situations
exist. After the preceding conditions no longer exist, the safety owner and
relevant technical personnel need to check the involved equipment. Operators
can begin working only after safety is confirmed.
● Set a restricted area and prominent signs for working at heights to warn
irrelevant personnel away.
● Set guard rails and warning signs at the edges and openings of the area
involving working at heights to prevent falls.
● Do not pile up scaffolding, springboards, or other sundries on the ground
under the area involving working at heights. Do not stay or pass under the
area involving working at heights.
● Carry operation machines and tools properly to prevent equipment damage or
personal injury caused by falling objects.
● Personnel involving working at heights are not allowed to throw objects from
the height to the ground, or vice versa. Objects shall be transported by slings,
hanging baskets, aerial work platforms, or cranes.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 12

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 1 Safety Information

● Do not perform operations on the upper and lower layers at the same time. If
unavoidable, install a dedicated protective shelter between the upper and
lower layers or take other protective measures. Do not pile up tools or
materials on the upper layer.
● Dismantle the scaffolding from top down after finishing the job. Do not
dismantle the upper and lower layers at the same time. When removing a
part, ensure that other parts will not collapse.
● Ensure that personnel working at heights strictly comply with the safety
regulations. The Company is not responsible for any accident caused by
violation of the safety regulations on working at heights.
● Behave cautiously when working at heights. Do not rest at heights.

Using Ladders
● Use wooden or insulated ladders when you need to perform live-line working
at heights.
● Platform ladders with protective rails are preferred. Single ladders are not
recommended.
● Before using a ladder, check that it is intact and confirm its load bearing
capacity. Do not overload it.
● Ensure that the ladder is securely positioned and held firm.

● When climbing up the ladder, keep your body stable and your center of
gravity between the side rails, and do not overreach to the sides.
● When a step ladder is used, ensure that the pull ropes are secured.
● If a single ladder is used, the recommended angle for the ladder against the
floor is 75 degrees, as shown in the following figure. A square can be used to
measure the angle.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 13

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 1 Safety Information

● If a single ladder is used, ensure that the wider end of the ladder is at the
bottom, and take protective measures to prevent the ladder from sliding.
● If a single ladder is used, do not climb higher than the fourth rung of the
ladder from the top.
● If you use a single ladder to climb up to a platform, ensure that the ladder is
at least 1 m higher than the platform.

Hoisting
● Only trained and qualified personnel are allowed to perform hoisting
operations.
● Install temporary warning signs or fences to isolate the hoisting area.
● Ensure that the foundation where hoisting is performed meets the load-
bearing requirements.
● Before hoisting objects, ensure that hoisting tools are firmly secured onto a
fixed object or wall that meets the load-bearing requirements.
● During hoisting, do not stand or walk under the crane or the hoisted objects.
● Do not drag steel ropes and hoisting tools or bump hoisted objects against
hard objects during hoisting.
● Ensure that the angle between two hoisting ropes is no more than 90
degrees, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 14

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 1 Safety Information

Drilling Holes
● Obtain consent from the customer and contractor before drilling holes.
● Wear protective equipment such as safety goggles and protective gloves when
drilling holes.
● To avoid short circuits or other risks, do not drill holes into buried pipes or
cables.
● When drilling holes, protect the equipment from shavings. After drilling, clean
up any shavings.

Welding
● A welder must have a work permit. Obtain consent from the customer before
welding.
● Ensure that at least two persons are present onsite for welding and that fire
extinguishers, wet cloth, and water containers are available.
● Ensure that the welding site is free from inflammables.
● Do not weld or cut on pressurized containers or pipes. Electric devices shall be
powered off before welding.
● A burning welding torch must not be placed on a component or on the floor,
and must not be placed in a metal container with acetylene and oxygen.
Otherwise, the gas may leak and cause a fire.
● High-temperature pipes after welding must be promptly cooled.

1.5 Equipment Safety

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 15

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 1 Safety Information

1.5.1 UPS Safety

General Requirements
● The UPS is used for commercial and industrial purposes only. It cannot be
used as a power supply for life support devices.
● For power supply systems that are critical to significant economic interests or
public order, such as the national computing center, emergency command
center, railway signal system and control center, civil aviation and air traffic
control center, airport command center, financial clearing center, and
transaction center, the Tier 4 or 3 power architecture specified in TIA-942
must be used. That is, two power supplies must be used to supply power to
loads.
● The UPS operating environment must meet the requirements for the climate
indicator, mechanically active substance indicator, and chemically active
substance indicator specified by ETSI EN 300 019-1 class 3.6.
● The UPS shall not be located in non-confined environments within 0–3.7 km
away from the ocean or indoor or semi-indoor environments where the
temperature and humidity are not controllable, such as shelters, civil houses,
garages, corridors, and direct ventilation cabinets near the ocean; or houses
with only roofs, railway station platforms, gymnasiums, and aquariums.
● It is recommended that the UPS be powered on as soon as possible after it is
unpacked.
● The UPS can be used to serve resistive-capacitive loads, resistive loads, and
micro-inductive loads. It is recommended that the UPS not be used for pure
capacitive loads, pure inductive loads, or half-wave rectification loads. The
UPS does not apply to regeneration loads.
● The UPS can be configured with a backfeed protection dry contact to work
with an external automatic circuit breaker, preventing the voltage from
flowing back to input terminals over static bypass circuits. If the installation
and maintenance personnel do not need backfeed protection, attach labels on
external mains and bypass input switches, informing that the UPS is
connected to a backfeed protection card. Disconnect the backfeed protection
card from the UPS before operating the UPS.
● The upstream power distribution of the UPS must meet the requirements of
protection against electric shock specified in IEC 60364-4-41.
● A circuit breaker equipped with a residual current device (RCD) is not
recommended.
● If the root mean square (RMS) of a phase voltage of the utility power exceeds
320 V AC, the UPS may be damaged.
● To ensure power supply to loads during UPS upgrade, set the output to
maintenance bypass mode. To avoid power failure or load damage, ensure
that the bypass input is within the specified power supply range.
● Exercise caution when manually shutting down the UPS inverter for
transferring to bypass mode, or when adjusting the UPS output voltage level
or output frequency. Doing so may affect the power supply to equipment.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 16

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 1 Safety Information

1.5.2 Cooling System Safety

High Temperature and Pressure

● Keep devices away from fire or high-temperature objects, especially devices
injected with pressurized nitrogen or refrigerant; otherwise, explosion or
refrigerant leakage may occur, causing personal injury.
● When maintaining or replacing components, pay attention to high-
temperature components (such as the compressor, refrigerant pipe, and
electric heater) to prevent scalds.
● When maintaining or replacing components, pay attention to high-pressure
components (such as the compressor and refrigerant pipe) to prevent the
refrigerant system from being cracked or exploded due to misoperations.

Refrigerant Frostbite
Refrigerant leakage may cause frostbite. Take protective measures (for example,
wear antifreeze gloves) when handling refrigerant.

Recycling

The sign indicates that the product cannot be disposed of with other wastes
that have a shell in European Union (EU) areas. To avoid environment pollution
and harm to human health, wastes must be classified and recycled. This also
promotes resource sustainability. To recycle an old device, use a recycling
collection system or contact the supplier.

1.5.3 Battery Safety

DANGER

Do not connect the positive and negative poles of a battery or battery string
together. Otherwise, the battery may be short-circuited. Battery short circuits can
generate high instantaneous current and releases a large amount of energy, which
may cause battery leakage, smoke, flammable gas release, thermal runaway, fire,
or explosion. To avoid battery short circuits, do not maintain batteries with power
on.

DANGER

Do not expose batteries at high temperatures or around heat sources, such as

scorching sunlight, fire sources, transformers, and heaters. Battery overheating
may cause leakage, smoke, flammable gas release, thermal runaway, fire, or
explosion.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 17

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 1 Safety Information

DANGER

Protect batteries from mechanical vibration, falling, collision, punctures, and

strong impact. Otherwise, the batteries may be damaged or catch fire.

DANGER

To avoid leakage, smoke, flammable gas release, thermal runaway, fire, or

explosion, do not disassemble, alter, or damage batteries, for example, insert
foreign matter into batteries, squeeze batteries, or immerse batteries in water or
other liquids.

DANGER

There is a risk of fire or explosion if the model of the battery in use or used for
replacement is incorrect. Use a battery of the model recommended by the vendor.

DANGER

Battery electrolyte is toxic and volatile. Do not get contact with leaked liquids or
gases in the case of battery leakage or emission of abnormal odor. In such cases,
stay away from the battery and contact professionals immediately. Professionals
shall wear safety goggles, rubber gloves, gas masks, and protective clothing,
power off the equipment, remove the battery, and contact technical engineers.

DANGER

The gases generated by a burning battery may irritate your eyes, skin, and throat.
Take protective measures.

WARNING

Install batteries in a dry area. Do not install them below areas prone to water
leakage, such as air conditioner vents, ventilation vents, feeder windows of the
equipment room, or water pipes. Ensure that no liquid enters the equipment to
prevent faults or short circuits.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 18

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 1 Safety Information

WARNING

Before installing and commissioning batteries, prepare fire fighting facilities, such
as fire sand and carbon dioxide fire extinguishers, according to construction
standards and regulations. Before putting the battery room into operation, ensure
that it is equipped with a fire extinguishing system that complies with local laws
and regulations, has been constructed and commissioned, and can work in
automatic or manual control mode.

WARNING

Before unpacking, storage, and transportation, ensure that the packing cases are
intact and correctly placed according to the labels on the packing cases. Do not
place a battery upside down or vertically, lay it on one side, or tilt it. Stack the
batteries according to the stacking requirements on the packing cases. Ensure that
the batteries do not fall or get damaged. Otherwise, they will need to be scrapped.

WARNING

After unpacking batteries, place them in the required direction. Do not place a
battery with its front panel facing upwards, put it upside down, tilt it, or stack it.
Ensure that the batteries do not fall or get damaged. Otherwise, they will need to
be scrapped.

WARNING

Tighten the screws on copper bars or cables to the torque specified in this
document. Periodically confirm whether the screws are tightened, check for rust,
corrosion, or other foreign objects, and clean them up if any. Loose screw
connections will result in excessive voltage drops and batteries may catch fire
when the current is high.

WARNING

After batteries are discharged, charge them in time to avoid damage due to
overdischarge.

Statement
The Company shall not be liable for any damage or other consequences to
the batteries it provides due to the following reasons:
● Batteries are damaged due to force majeure such as earthquakes, floods,
volcanic eruptions, debris flows, lightning strikes, fires, wars, armed conflicts,
typhoons, hurricanes, tornadoes, and extreme weather conditions.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 19

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 1 Safety Information

● Batteries are damaged because the onsite equipment operating environment

or external power parameters do not meet the environment requirements for
normal operation, for example, the actual operating temperature of batteries
is too high or too low, or the power grid is unstable and experiences outages
frequently.
● Batteries are damaged, fall, leak, or crack due to improper operations or
incorrect connection.
● After being installed and connected to the system, the batteries are not
powered on in time due to your reasons, which causes damage to the
batteries due to overdischarge.
● Batteries are damaged because they are not accepted in time due to your
reasons.
● You set battery operating parameters incorrectly.
● You use batteries of different types together, causing acceleration of capacity
attenuation. For example, you use our batteries together with batteries of
other vendors or with batteries of different rated capacity.
● You maintain batteries improperly, causing frequent overdischarge; you
expand the load capacity without notifying us; or you have not fully charged
the batteries for a long time.
● You do not perform battery maintenance based on the operation guide, such
as failure to check battery terminals regularly.
● Batteries are damaged because you do not store them in accordance with
storage requirements (for example, in an environment that is damp or prone
to rain).
● Batteries are not charged as required during storage due to your reasons,
resulting in capacity loss or other irreversible damages to the batteries.
● Batteries are damaged due to your or a third party's reasons, for example,
relocating or reinstalling the batteries without complying with the Company's
requirements.
● You change the battery use scenarios without notifying the Company.
● You connect extra loads to the batteries.
● The battery storage period has exceeded the upper limit.
● The battery warranty period has expired.

General Requirements

NOTICE

To ensure battery safety and battery management accuracy, use batteries provided
by the Company. The Company is not responsible for any faults of batteries
provided by other vendors.

● Before installing, operating, and maintaining batteries, read the battery

vendor's instructions and comply with their requirements. The safety
precautions specified in this document are highly important and require
special attention. For additional safety precautions, see the instructions
provided by the battery vendors.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 20

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 1 Safety Information

● Use batteries within the specified temperature range. When the ambient
temperature of the batteries is lower than the allowed range, do not charge
the batteries to prevent internal short circuits caused during low-temperature
charging.
● Do not reversely connect the positive and negative battery terminals.
Otherwise, a battery alarm will be generated and batteries may be damaged.
● Before unpacking batteries, check whether the packaging is intact. Do not use
batteries with damaged packaging. If any damage is found, notify the carrier
and manufacturer immediately.
● In an indoor scenario, you are advised to power on a battery within seven
days after unpacking. If the battery cannot be powered on in time, put it in
the original packing case and place it in a dry indoor environment without
corrosive gas.
● Do not use a damaged battery (such as damage caused when a battery is
dropped, bumped, bulged, or dented on the enclosure), because the damage
may cause electrolyte leakage or flammable gas release. In the case of
electrolyte leakage or structural deformation, contact the installer or
professional O&M personnel immediately to remove or replace the battery.
Do not store the damaged battery near other devices or flammable materials
and keep it away from non-professionals.
● Before working on a battery, ensure that there is no irritating or burning smell
around the battery.
● When installing batteries, do not place installation tools, metal parts, or
sundries on the batteries. After the installation is complete, clean up the
objects on the batteries and the surrounding area.
● If a battery is accidentally exposed to water, do not install it. Move it to a safe
place for isolation and contact technical engineers in a timely manner.
● Check whether the positive and negative battery terminals are grounded
unexpectedly. If so, disconnect the battery terminals from the ground.
● Do not perform welding or grinding work around batteries to prevent fire
caused by electric sparks or arcs.
● If batteries will not be used for a long period of time, store and charge them
according to the battery requirements.
● Do not charge or discharge batteries by using a device that does not comply
with local laws and regulations.
● Keep the battery loop disconnected during installation and maintenance.
● Monitor damaged batteries during storage for signs of smoke, flame,
electrolyte leakage, or heat.
● If a battery is faulty, its surface temperature may be high. Do not touch the
battery to avoid scalds.

Short-Circuit Protection
● When installing and maintaining batteries, wrap the exposed cable terminals
on the batteries with insulation tape.
● Avoid foreign objects (such as conductive objects, screws, and liquids) from
entering a battery, as this may cause short circuits.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 21

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 1 Safety Information

Leakage Handling

NOTICE

Electrolyte overflow may damage the equipment. It will corrode metal parts and
boards, and ultimately damage the boards.

Electrolyte is corrosive and can cause irritation and chemical burns. If you come
into direct contact with the battery electrolyte, do as follows:
● Inhalation: Evacuate from contaminated areas, get fresh air immediately, and
seek immediate medical attention.
● Eye contact: Immediately wash your eyes with water for at least 15 minutes,
do not rub your eyes, and seek immediate medical attention.
● Skin contact: Wash the affected areas immediately with soap and water and
seek immediate medical attention.
● Intake: Seek immediate medical attention.

Recycling
● Dispose of waste batteries in accordance with local laws and regulations. Do
not dispose of batteries as household waste. Improper disposal of batteries
may result in environmental pollution or an explosion.
● If a battery leaks or is damaged, contact technical support or a battery
recycling company for disposal.
● If batteries are out of service life, contact a battery recycling company for
disposal.
● Do not expose waste batteries to high temperatures or direct sunlight.
● Do not place waste batteries in environments with high humidity or corrosive
substances.
● Do not use faulty batteries. Contact a battery recycling company to scrap
them as soon as possible to avoid environmental pollution.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 22

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 2 Overview

2 Overview

2.1 Positioning
To meet the requirements for customers' growing services, the Company launches
the FusionModule500 that can be rapidly deployed and flexibly expanded. The
FusionModule500 is positioned as a small edge data center solution and occupies
about 10 m2. It is mainly used in the equipment rooms of county-level
governments, bank business outlets, and small- and medium-sized enterprises.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 23

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 2 Overview

Figure 2-1 Position of the FusionModule500 in the financial industry

(1) FusionModule5000 (2) FusionModule2000

(3) FusionModule800 (4) FusionModule500

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 24

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 2 Overview

Figure 2-2 Position of the FusionModule500 for governments

(1) FusionModule5000 (2) FusionModule2000

(3) FusionModule800 (4) FusionModule500

2.2 Features
High Integration
The smart module provides a comprehensive solution by integrating the cabinet
structure system, power supply and distribution system, cooling system,
management system, fire extinguishing system, and surge protection and
grounding system.

High Safety and Reliability

● The Converged Cabinet incorporates the UPS, monitoring, power distribution,
and cooling devices that are designed in modular manner, delivering high
safety and reliability.
● The powerful monitoring system allows you to master the infrastructure
status anytime and improves the cabinet protection capability.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 25

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 2 Overview

High Scalability
● The modular design allows the smart module to be flexibly configured so that
fast capacity expansion can be achieved.
● The smart module provides redundant power ports and communications ports
for future expansion.

Powerful Monitoring
● The smart module provides various sensors to monitor the functional
modules.
● The smart module provides a display to easily manage the functional modules
locally.

2.3 Typical Application Scenarios and Configurations

2.3.1 Typical Scenarios
The solution is mainly used in network access rooms of bank business outlets,
small- and medium-sized enterprises, and government departments. It is mainly
sold in the following regions:
● Asia, Europe, and Africa: China, Asia Pacific, Africa, Europe, and Middle East.
The solution supports the 220 V/230 V/240 V, 1 Ph, 50/60 Hz power systems.
● Latin America: The solution supports the 208 V, 2 Ph, 60 Hz power system.

2.3.2 Typical Configurations

Figure 2-3 Converged Cabinet (02116410)

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 26

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 2 Overview

Figure 2-4 Converged Cabinet (02116411)

Figure 2-5 Converged Cabinet (02116412)

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 27

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 2 Overview

Table 2-1 Typical configurations

Item Converged Converged Converged
Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet
Specifications Specifications Specifications

BOM number 02116410 02116411 02116412

Model FusionModule500 FusionModule500 FusionModule500

-U61FSL -U61A21SL -U61A21TL

Cabinet 2000 mm x 600 mm x 1100 mm

dimensions (H x
W x D)

Cooling No 3.5 kW integrated 3.5 kW integrated

air conditioner air conditioner

Power distribution UPS2000-H, UPS2000-H, UPS2000-H,

lithium battery, lithium battery, lithium battery,
rPDU, and rPDU, and rPDU, PDU5000,
PDU5000 PDU5000 and transformer

Backup time 60–240 minutes 60–240 minutes 60–240 minutes

Monitoring ECC800-Pro, ECC800-Pro, T/H ECC800-Pro, T/H

temperature and sensor, smoke sensor, smoke
humidity (T/H) detector, water detector, water
sensor, smoke sensor, PAD, sensor, PAD,
detector, water cabinet electronic cabinet electronic
sensor, door clasp lock, WiFi clasp lock, WiFi
status sensor, PAD module, and module, and
(optional), WiFi NetEco (optional) NetEco (optional)
module
(optional), and
NetEco (optional)

Fire extinguishing Room-level fire Rack-mounted Rack-mounted

system control linkage integrated fire integrated fire
extinguishing extinguishing
device (optional) device (optional)

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 28

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

3 System Architecture

3.1 Structural System

The cabinet possesses the following features:

● The cabinet houses standard 19-inch wide devices.

● rPDUs are installed at the rear of the cabinet.
● The position of each U is marked on the vertical mounting bars.
● The front and rear doors of the cabinet can be locked, and can be unlocked
by using dedicated keys.
● The cabinet can be installed on a base (which needs to be prepared by
customers).
● The cabinet can house ICT devices with a depth of no more than 750 mm.

Table 3-1 Cabinet technical specifications

Item Specifications

Color Black

Material High-intensity class A carbon cold

rolled steel plate and zinc-coated steel
plate

Air channel Cold and hot aisle containment

Installation mode Installed on a concrete floor or

electrostatic discharge (ESD) floor

Static load 2400 kg

Dynamic load 1000 kg

IP rating IP20

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 29

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

3.2 Power Supply and Distribution System

3.2.1 Overview
The UPS supplies uninterruptible power to loads by means of lithium batteries
when the external power supply fails.

Figure 3-1 Power distribution diagram in Asia, Africa, and Europe (02116410 &
02116411)

Figure 3-2 Power distribution diagram in Latin America (02116412)

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 30

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

3.2.2 Power Distribution Subrack

Table 3-2 Technical specifications

Item Specifications (Asia, Specifications (Latin

Africa, and Europe) America)

Maximum input current 63 A

Number of phases Single phase Dual–live wire

Input frequency 50/60 Hz 60 Hz

Input voltage 220 V 208 V

Output frequency 50/60 Hz 60 Hz

General input 63 A/2P -

UPS input 63 A/1P 63 A/2P

UPS output 63 A/1P 63 A/2P

UPS bypass 63 A/2P

Output branch 3 x 40 A/1P, 2 x 16 A/1P 4 x 40 A/1P

Battery output 125 A/2P

Smart cooling switch 25 A/1P 16 A/2P

Dimensions (H x W x D) 130 mm x 442 mm x 450 mm

3.2.3 Transformer

Figure 3-3 Transformer

Table 3-3 Transformer technical specifications

Item Specifications

Rated capacity 10 kVA

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 31

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Item Specifications

Rated input current 48 A

Rated input voltage Dual-live wire 208 V

Input frequency 60 Hz

Output voltage Single-phase 120 V

Output frequency 60 Hz

Efficiency (full load) 96%

Dimensions (H x W x D) 130 mm x 430 mm x 650 mm

Weight 65 kg

3.2.4 UPS2000-H-6 kVA

The UPS2000-H system can form a minimum uninterruptible power supply system
(with lithium batteries). The UPS contains main power circuits such as rectifier,
inverter, and bypass, as well as extra-low voltage (ELV) circuits such as the
monitoring circuit and parallel control circuit. Its external ports include power
input and output terminals, parallel ports, communications ports, and
communications slots.

UPS Appearance

Figure 3-4 Front and rear views of a 6 kVA UPS

(1) Button (power-on/ (2) Bypass indicator (3) Fault indicator (4) Battery indicator
off, WiFi on/off, and
battery cold start)

(5) Inverter indicator (6) WiFi indicator (7) Load rate indicator (8) Battery SOC
indicator

(9) Labela (10) Battery ports (11) AC input ports (12) AC output ports

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 32

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

(13) RESET button (14) USB port (15) CAN (16) Parallel ports
communications ports
(COM & MON1–
MON3)

(17) Optional card slot (18) EPO port (19) Maintenance

bypass port (MBS)

NOTE

● Optional card slot: Houses the SNMP card and dry contact card.
● RESET button: To restore the initial WiFi password and user password, hold down the
RESET button on the UPS rear panel for 10s using a sharp object.
● a: Scan the SN and QR code to download the app, connect to the WiFi network, and
view documents such as user manual, quick guide, and video. The information on the
label is for reference only. The actual parameters may vary.

UPS Button Functions

Table 3-4 UPS button functions

Function Description

Starting the inverter When the UPS works in bypass mode (the bypass
indicator is on), hold down the button on the UPS
panel for more than 5s. Release the button when the
inverter indicator blinks and you hear a beep sound. Do
not press any button during inverter startup. When the
startup command is successfully delivered, and the
inverter indicator is steady on, the UPS enters normal
mode.

Shutting down the When the UPS works in inverter mode, hold down the
inverter button on the UPS panel for more than 5s. Release the
button when the inverter indicator blinks and you hear
a beep sound. Do not press any button during inverter
shutdown. When the shutdown command is
successfully delivered, and the inverter indicator is off,
the UPS shuts down the inverter output and enters
bypass mode.

Enabling WiFi When the WiFi is disabled, hold down the button for
0.5s to enable the WiFi (the WiFi indicator is on).

Disabling WiFi When the WiFi is enabled, hold down the button for
0.5s to disable the WiFi (the WiFi indicator is off).

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 33

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Function Description

Cold-starting the UPSs When the mains is abnormal or disconnected, connect

using batteries the battery and hold down the lithium battery switch
for at least 5s and less than 15s to power on the
lithium battery.
Hold down the UPS button for 3s (the bypass indicator,
battery indicator, and inverter indicator are on at the
same time), and the UPS is powered on. After the UPS
initialization is complete (about 10s), the indicator
status changes and the UPS enters the standby state
(the WiFi indicator is on and the fault indicator blinks).
Hold down the UPS button for more than 5s, and the
UPS enters battery mode.

Indicators

Table 3-5 Indicator description

Icon Indicator Color Status Description

Fault indicator Green Steady on The UPS is normal.

Red Blinking A minor alarm is

generated.

Steady on A critical alarm is

generated.

Bypass indicator Yellow Steady on Bypass mode

Off Non-bypass mode

Battery Yellow Steady on Battery mode

indicator
Off Non-battery mode

Inverter Green Steady on Inverter mode

indicator
Off Non-inverter mode

WiFi indicator Green Steady on WiFi enabled

Blinking The mobile phone is

connected to the WiFi
network of the UPS.

Off WiFi disabled

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 34

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Icon Indicator Color Status Description

Battery SOC Green When the battery SOC

indicator is 0%, the four
indicators are off.
0% < Battery SOC <
25%
25% indicator: blinking
Other indicators: off

25% ≤ Battery SOC <

50%
25% indicator: steady
on
50% indicator: When
the battery SOC is 25%,
the indicator is off.
When the battery SOC
is greater than 25%, the
indicator blinks.
Other indicators: off

50% ≤ Battery SOC <

75%
25% indicator: steady
on
50% indicator: steady
on
75% indicator: When
the battery SOC is 50%,
the indicator is off.
When the battery SOC
is greater than 50%, the
indicator blinks.
100% indicator: off

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 35

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Icon Indicator Color Status Description

75% ≤ Battery SOC <

100%
25% indicator: steady
on
50% indicator: steady
on
75% indicator: steady
on
100% indicator: When
the battery SOC is 75%,
the indicator is off.
When the battery SOC
is greater than 75%, the
indicator blinks.
Battery SOC: 100%
The four indicators are
steady on.

Load rate Green When the load rate is

indicator 0%, the four indicators
are off.
0% < Load rate < 25%
25% indicator: blinking
Other indicators: off

25% ≤ Load rate < 50%

25% indicator: steady
on
50% indicator: When
the load rate is 25%,
the indicator is off.
When the load rate is
greater than 25%, the
indicator blinks.
Other indicators: off

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 36

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Icon Indicator Color Status Description

50% ≤ Load rate < 75%

25% indicator: steady
on
50% indicator: steady
on
75% indicator: When
the load rate is 50%,
the indicator is off.
When the load rate is
greater than 50%, the
indicator blinks.
100% indicator: off

75% ≤ Load rate <

100%
25% indicator: steady
on
50% indicator: steady
on
75% indicator: steady
on
100% indicator: When
the load rate is 75%,
the indicator is off.
When the load rate is
greater than 75%, the
indicator blinks.
Load rate ≥ 100%
The four indicators are
steady on.

NOTE

If multiple lithium batteries are connected in parallel, the UPS battery indicator shows the
status of the lithium battery with the lowest capacity in the parallel battery group.

Table 3-6 Functions of CAN communications ports

Silk Screen Function

COM Used for lithium battery communication

MON1 Used for ECC800-Pro communication

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 37

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Silk Screen Function

MON2 ● The Modbus-RTU communications protocol

supported
MON3
● Used for communication between parallel UPSs

NOTE

The MON1, MON2, and MON3 ports can be connected to the NMS that supports only one
protocol at a time.

3.2.5 rPDU

3.2.5.1 Non-intelligent rPDU

The rPDU is a basic socket which does not support monitoring functions.

Figure 3-5 Horizontal rPDU

Figure 3-6 Vertical full-height rPDU

Table 3-7 rPDU technical specifications

Item Specifications Specifications (Vertical
(Horizontal 1 U rPDU) Full-Height rPDU)

Rated current 16 A 40 A

Input frequency 50 Hz/60 Hz 50 Hz/60 Hz

Input port Cord end terminal, no Cord end terminal, no

input cable input cable

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 38

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Item Specifications Specifications (Vertical

(Horizontal 1 U rPDU) Full-Height rPDU)

Output port IEC: 8 x C13 IEC: 20 x C13 + 2 x C19

configuration GB: seven sockets that Chinese national
comply with Chinese standard: 20 x 10 A + 2 x
national standards 16 A

Rated output current 16 A 32 A

3.2.5.2 Intelligent rPDU

The intelligent rPDU accurately and effectively monitors the real-time status
changes of the current, voltage, power, and electric energy of electrical devices in
the data center.

Figure 3-7 Horizontal rPDU

Table 3-8 rPDU technical specifications

Item Specifications (Horizontal 2 U rPDU)

Dimensions (H x W x D) 56 mm x 89 mm x 476 mm

Rated current 16 A

Input frequency 50 Hz/60 Hz

Input port Cord end terminal

Output port configuration 8 x C13

Rated output current 16 A

Monitoring function Monitors the input power, voltage,

current, power factor, and electric
energy.

3.2.6 Lithium Battery ESM-48100B1

Lithium batteries provide backup power. When the mains is normal, the UPS
charges batteries. When the mains fails, lithium batteries supply power to the UPS.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 39

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Figure 3-8 Lithium battery

Table 3-9 Lithium battery technical specifications

Item Specifications

Capacity 100 Ah

Voltage 48 V DC

Dimensions (H x W x D) 130 mm x 442 mm x 396 mm (excluding

mounting ears)

Weight (one lithium battery) 43 kg

Maximum charge/discharge 100 A/100 A@35°C (The actual charge

current current depends on the UPS charge
capability.)

Maximum charge/discharge 4800 W

power

Installation mode Rack-mounted

3.3 Cooling System

Figure 3-9 Integrated air conditioner

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 40

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

3.3.1 Application Conditions

Operating Environment

Table 3-10 Operating environment

Item Integrated Air Conditioner

Operating temperature 0–40°C

Operating humidity 5%–95% RH (non-condensing)

Storage temperature –40°C to +70°C (without refrigerant)

–40°C to +55°C (with refrigerant)

Storage humidity 5%–95% RH (non-condensing)

Altitude 0–4000 m, derated at above 1000 m For details

about derating coefficients, see Table 3-11.

Table 3-11 Derating coefficients

Altitude 0 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000

(m)

Air 1 0.887 0.835 0.785 0.737 0.692 0.649 0.608

volume
coefficie
nt

Cooling 1 0.940 0.909 0.878 0.846 0.815 0.784 0.753

capacity
coefficie
nt

3.3.2 Technical Specifications

Table 3-12 Technical specifications

Item Integrated Air Conditioner

Power system 208–240 V AC, 50 Hz/60 Hz, 1 Ph

Refrigerant R410A

Cooling capacity 3.5 kWa

Air supply mode Front flow or front upflow

Dimensions (H x W x D) 355 mm x 442 mm x 930 mm

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 41

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Item Integrated Air Conditioner

Net weight ≤ 60 kg

IP rating IP20

a: The cooling capacity is obtained when the cabinet internal dry bulb
temperature is 37°C, the cabinet internal wet bulb temperature is 24°C, and the
cabinet external dry bulb temperature is 35°C. The actual cooling capacity varies
depending on the ambient temperatures and relative humidity inside and
outside the cabinet.

3.4 Management System

3.4.1 Overview
The smart module monitoring solution consists of the collector and monitoring
components. The ECC800-Pro functions as the collector.

The smart module provides a module-level PAD for local intelligent management
in terms of real-time monitoring, status browsing, alarm management, and
system configuration.

The NetEco can manage the infrastructures of a single data center or of data
centers in various areas in a centralized manner.

The ECC800-Pro manages the real-time status, alarms, and configuration

information about the devices inside the smart module. It also provides a
graphical user interface (GUI) for ease of operating and maintaining devices inside
the smart module.

Figure 3-10 System networking diagram (02116410)

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 42

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Figure 3-11 System networking diagram (0211641 & 02116412)

3.4.2 System Functions

3.4.2.1 Monitoring
● Temperature and humidity monitoring: Detects and collects statistics on the
ambient temperature and humidity inside the smart module; provides real-
time alarm signals.
● Water leakage monitoring: Detects water leakage at the bottom of the smart
module and provides real-time alarm signals.
● Smoke monitoring: Detects smoke in the smart module and provides real-
time alarm signals.
● Power distribution monitoring: Detects the UPS input voltage, frequency, and
current.
● Smart cooling product monitoring:
a. Monitors the supply and return air temperatures in real time.
b. Allows you to set the return air temperature setpoint for a single product.
c. Monitors and displays the fan speed, and displays the running
percentage.
d. Monitors and displays the compressor running status.

3.4.2.2 App View

● Generates a 2.5D layout view that matches the actual layout of the smart
module, including the power distribution module, smart cooling product, and
T/H sensor. The ambient temperature and humidity are also displayed on the
home page of the app.
● Displays the real-time status monitoring data and alarms of the aisle
temperature and humidity on the floor plan.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 43

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

● After logging in to the app installed on the PAD, you can open the cabinet
door on the corresponding screen.

3.4.2.3 Alarm
● The system monitors the status of smart cooling products, power distribution,
and environment. If a fault or parameter error occurs, the system generates
an alarm in real time. You can view the alarm cause and solution in the alarm
details.
● Alarms can be classified into four severities: critical, major, minor, and
warning. The alarm severities can be user-defined.
● Active alarms can be filtered by device and alarm severity.
● Alarm notifications can be sent by email and SMS.
● A maximum of 500 concurrent active alarms are supported.

3.4.2.4 Historical Data Query

● Historical alarm query: You can view the alarms that have been generated in
the system. The historical alarm information includes the device name, alarm
name, alarm severity, alarm generation time, and alarm clearance time.
● Performance data statistics: You can view historical data of devices to help
analyze data or problems.
● Operation log query: You can view logs of key operations, such as user login,
parameter modification, data export, device upgrade, and access control
events.
● Data export: You can export historical data of the ECC800-Pro and some
southbound devices.

3.4.2.5 Linkage Control

● Supports the linkage logic of aisle smoke alarms or high temperature alarms.
By default, the cabinet doors are opened through linkage by default.
NOTE

Aisle smoke alarms cannot trigger the customer's fire extinguishing system. Only dry
contact alarm signals are provided.
● Supports the aisle emergency ventilation linkage logic. The cabinet doors are
opened by default under linkage.
● If the protected area of the fire extinguishing system is inside the smart
module, when a smoke alarm is generated, the door of the linked cabinet
does not open. If the door is opened, an alarm (door open alarm) is
generated.
● If the protected area of the fire extinguishing system is outside the smart
module, when a smoke alarm is generated, the rear door of the linked cabinet
is opened.

3.4.3 Key Hardware Devices

3.4.3.1 ECC800-Pro

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 44

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

3.4.3.1.1 Product Configuration

The ECC800-Pro data center controller monitors the devices and environment
inside the smart module.

Figure 3-12 ECC800-Pro

(1) Main control module

Table 3-13 ECC800-Pro environmental specifications

Item Specifications

Operating –20°C to +50°C

temperature

Storage temperature –40°C to +70°C

Relative humidity 5%–95% RH (non-condensing)

Altitude 0–4000 m (When the altitude is between 3000 m and

4000 m, the temperature decreases by 1°C for each
additional 200 m.)

Table 3-14 ECC800-Pro structural specifications

Item Specifications

Dimensions (L x W x H) 442 mm x 330 mm x 43.6 mm

Color Black

Installation requirements Can be installed in a 1 U space in a

standard 19-inch cabinet

Environmental protection RoHS5, REACH, WEEE

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 45

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Figure 3-13 ECC800-Pro (rear view)

(1) AC_INPUT

Power Ports
The ECC800-Pro provides one single-phase AC input port (AC_INPUT). Table 3-15
lists the pin definitions.

Table 3-15 Port pin definitions

Port Type Pin Description

Sequenc
e

AC Pin 1 L

Pin 2 PE

Pin 3 No

3.4.3.1.2 Main Control Module

Figure 3-14 ECC800-Pro main control module

(1) USB (2) Status indicator (3) AIDI_1 (4) AIDI_2

(5) COM1/AIDI_4 (6) COM3/12V (7) WAN1 (8) LAN1/POE

(9) LAN2/POE (10) WAN2 (11) COM4/CAN (12) COM2/AIDI_5

(13) AIDI_3 (14) DO/12V (15) RF_Z (16) WLAN

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 46

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

(17) 4G port (18) SW button

Figure 3-15 ECC800-Pro main control module (side view)

(1) SIM card slot (2) Micro SD card slot (reserved)

Technical Specifications

Table 3-16 Technical specifications of the ECC800-Pro main control module

Item Specifications

Power input ● Supports one AC input.

● Rated voltage: 200–240 V AC
● Rated frequency: 50 Hz/60 Hz

Power output ● Output voltage: 42–58 V DC (rated voltage: 53.5 V DC)

● Output power of two power module supplies: 2000 W (200–
240 V AC); 940 W (linear derating at 85–175 V AC)
● Output power of a single power module supply: 1000 W
(200–240 V AC); 470 W (linear derating at 85–175 V AC)

WAN port ● Supports two WAN ports. WAN1 is used to connect to the
management system, and WAN2 is used for maintenance.
The ports support autonegotiation of 10/100/1000 Mbit/s
communication rates.
● Connect shielded network cables to the WAN ports.

LAN port ● Supports two LAN ports, which can be connected to the
LAN. The ports support autonegotiation of 10/100/1000
Mbit/s communication rates.
● Connect shielded network cables to the LAN ports.

RS485 serial ● Output voltage: 13–15 V DC (rated voltage: 14.5 V DC)

port ● Four RS485 ports with the default communications rate of
expansion 9600 bit/s
● COM1–COM3 ports provide 12 V DC power.
● The power supply can be switched on or off and is on by
default.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 47

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Item Specifications

PoE expansion Supports two PoE (GE) ports for expansion of the PoE bus, and
supports network isolation and ring network.

AIDI ● Output voltage: 13–15 V DC (rated voltage: 14.5 V DC)

expansion ● Provides five universal AIDI ports for connecting to sensors
(RJ45) such as smoke sensors, water sensors, and NTC sensors.
AIDI_1 to AIDI_3 are full-function AIDI ports, and AIDI_4 to
AIDI_5 are simplified AIDI ports without type identification.
● The power supply can be switched on or off and is on by
default.

DO expansion ● Output voltage: 13–15 V DC (rated voltage: 14.5 V DC)

(RJ45) ● Supports one active DO port.
● The power supply can be switched on or off and is on by
default.

Fault isolation There are three groups of 12 V ports. A group has a maximum
current of 660 mA, a route has a maximum current of 800 mA,
and the maximum total current is 2 A.
Group 1: AIDI_1 and DO/12V ports
Group 2: AIDI_2, COM1/AIDI_4, and COM3/12V ports
Group 3: AIDI_3 and COM2/AIDI_5 ports

Wireless Supports wireless communication that complies with

communicatio IEEE802.15.4.
n

4G Supports the 4G module, SMS sending, and 3G communication,

and provides a standard SIM card slot.
1. China: 2G and 4G networks support China Unicom or China
Mobile SIM cards, and 3G networks support only China
Unicom SIM cards.
2. Outside China: Select SIM cards according to the following
wireless modes and frequency bands:
● 4G: wireless mode (FDD-LTE and TDD-LTE), coverage
frequency band (B1, B3, B5, B7, B8, and B20)
● 3G: wireless mode (WCDMA), coverage frequency bands
(B38, B40, and B41)
● 2G: wireless mode (GSM), coverage frequency band
(900/1800 MHz)
NOTE
● The prerequisite for using a SIM card is that the site has signal
coverage.
● Due to the performance limitation of the wireless module, China
Telecom SIM cards are not supported.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 48

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Item Specifications

USB ● Supports USB 2.0 and 5 V, 1 A power supply.

● After installing the WiFi module, connect the WiFi module
to the ECC800-Pro using the app on the PAD to view the
basic information about the smart module, such as layout,
resources, energy efficiency, environment, and alarms.
● You can insert a USB flash drive to export historical data
and configuration files and import configuration files.

SW button ● Restores the default IP address, factory settings, and user

information.
● RF_Z (802.15.4) networking

Table 3-17 ECC800-Pro RF_Z parameters

Item Specifications

RF_Z operation 2405–2480 MHz

frequency

RF_Z EIRP power 8 dBm

(max.)

Table 3-18 ECC800-Pro 4G parameters

Item Specifications

3G/4G operation LTE (FDD): BAND1, BAND2, BAND3, BAND4, BAND5,

frequency BAND7, BAND8, BAND20
DC-HSPA+/HSPA+/HSPA/UMTS: 850/900/1900/2100
MHz
GSM/GPRS/EDGE: 850/900/1800/1900 MHz

3G/4G EIRP power 23 dBm

(max.)

Communications Ports
The ECC800-Pro provides the following communications ports. Figure 3-16 shows
the pins of the RJ45 port.

Figure 3-16 RJ45 port pins

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 49

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

There are four GE ports, that is, two WAN ports (WAN1 and WAN2) and two LAN
ports (LAN1/POE and LAN2/POE).

Table 3-19 GE port pin definitions

Item Description

Pin Pin 1 GE1+

sequence
Pin 2 GE1–

Pin 3 GE2+

Pin 4 GE3+

Pin 5 GE3–

Pin 6 GE2–

Pin 7 GE4+

Pin 8 GE4–

Indicator Green Linked, steady on

indicator

Yellow ACT data communication, blinking

indicator

Table 3-20 COM1/AIDI_4, COM2/AIDI_5 port pin definitions

Item Description

Pin Pin 1 RS485+

sequence
Pin 2 RS485–

Pin 3 12 V DC_OUT

Pin 4 RS485+

Pin 5 RS485–

Pin 6 DI–

Pin 7 DI+

Pin 8 GND

Indicator Green Power output indicator

indicator ● Steady on: The 12 V DC output is normal.
● Off: No 12 V DC output is provided.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 50

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Table 3-21 COM3/12V port pin definitions

Item Description

Pin Pin 1 RS485+

sequence
Pin 2 RS485–

Pin 3 12 V DC_OUT

Pin 4 RS485+

Pin 5 RS485–

Pin 6 -

Pin 7 -

Pin 8 GND

Indicator Green Power output indicator

indicator ● Steady on: The 12 V DC output is normal.
● Off: No 12 V DC output is provided.

Table 3-22 COM4/CAN port pin definitions

Item Description

Pin Pin 1 RS485+

sequence
Pin 2 RS485–

Pin 3 -

Pin 4 RS485+

Pin 5 RS485–

Pin 6 -

Pin 7 CAN_H

Pin 8 CAN_L

The following provides the AIDI_1, AIDI_2 and AIDI_3 ports pin definitions.

NOTE

● Pins 1, 2, 4, and 5 identify sensor types.

● Pin 3 and Pin 8 are power output ports.
● Pin 6 and Pin 7 collect sensor data. Pin 7 can detect current type sensors (4–20 mA). Pin
6 and Pin 7 can detect the output status of passive dry contact type sensors. Pin 3 and
Pin 7 can detect temperature sensors.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 51

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Table 3-23 AIDI_1, AIDI_2 and AIDI_3 ports pin definitions

Item Description

Pin Pin 1 Type_1

sequence
Pin 2 Type_2

Pin 3 12 V DC

Pin 4 Type_3

Pin 5 Type_4

Pin 6 DI–

Pin 7 DI+

Pin 8 GND

Indicator Green Power output indicator

indicator ● Steady on: The 12 V DC output is normal.
● Off: No 12 V DC output is provided.

Table 3-24 DO/12V port pin definitions

Item Description

Pin Pin 1 -
sequence
Pin 2 -

Pin 3 12 V DC_OUT

Pin 4 -

Pin 5 -

Pin 6 DO_OUT+

Pin 7 DO_OUT–

Pin 8 GND

Indicator Green Power output indicator

indicator ● Steady on: The 12 V DC output is normal.
● Off: No 12 V DC output is provided.

Table 3-25 USB port pin definitions

Item Description

Pin sequence Pin 1 5V

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 52

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Item Description

Pin 2 DM

Pin 3 DP

Pin 4 GND

Indicators

Table 3-26 Indicators on the ECC800-Pro main control module

Indica Color Name Status Description
tor

RUN Green Running status Steady on The power supply is normal;

indicator the program is being loaded.

Off The power supply is

abnormal.

Blinking at The software runs properly

long (the indicator blinks at 0.5
intervals Hz, on for 1s and then off
for 1s) or the ECC800-Pro
registers with the NetEco
successfully.

Blinking at The ECC800-Pro does not

short register with the NetEco
intervals (the indicator blinks at 5 Hz,
on for 0.125s and then off
for 0.125s).

ALM Red Alarm indicator Steady on A system failure alarm is

generated.

Off The system is normal.

RF_Z Green Communication Blinking at A network is set up, and no

status indicator long node access is allowed (the
intervals indicator blinks at 0.5 Hz, on
for 1s and then off for 1s).

Blinking at A network is set up, and

super node access is allowed (the
short indicator blinks at 10 Hz, on
intervals for 0.05s and then off for
0.05s).

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 53

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

SW Button

Table 3-27 SW button description

Function Operation Description Indicator Status

Description

Wireless In non-wireless network (802.15.4) The RF_Z indicator is

network RF_Z pairing mode, press and hold down blinking at super
(802.15.4) the button for 3s to 5s to enter the short intervals.
pairing wireless network pairing mode.

In wireless network (802.15.4) The RF_Z indicator is

pairing mode, press and hold down blinking at long
the button for 3s to 5s to exit the intervals.
pairing mode; or the system
automatically exits the pairing mode
after 30 minutes without pressing
the button.

Press and hold down the button for The RF_Z indicator is
more than 8s to clear network steady on.
parameters.

WLAN enabling Press and hold down the button for None
1s to enable WLAN.

Restoring the Press and hold down the button for None
default IP 1 minute.
address, factory
settings, and
user information

3.4.3.2 Environment Monitoring System

3.4.3.2.1 Electrode Water Sensor

The electrode water sensor with the BOM number of 33010444 contains electrode
probes and cables.

Figure 3-17 Electrode water sensor

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 54

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Table 3-28 Technical specifications of the electrode water sensor

Item Specification

Operating –40°C to +80°C

temperature

Storage –40°C to +80°C

temperature

3.4.3.2.2 T/H Sensor

Figure 3-18 Appearance

The T/H sensor provides RJ45 ports.

NOTE

The appearance of the T/H sensor delivered onsite may vary.

Figure 3-19 RJ45 port pins

Table 3-29 RJ45 port pin definitions

Pin Description

Pin1 or Pin4 A

Pin2 or Pin5 B

Pin 3 V+

Pin 6 or Pin 8 V–

Pin 7 Disconnected

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 55

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Table 3-30 T/H sensor specifications

Item Specifications

Temperature measuring range –20°C to +70°C

Temperature precision ±1°C

Humidity measuring range 5%–95% RH

Humidity precision ±5% RH (25°C, 20%–80% RH)

Operating temperature –20°C to +70°C

Operating voltage 9–16 V DC

Storage temperature –40°C to +70°C

Output RS485

3.4.3.2.3 Smoke Detector

A smoke detector detects smoke around cabinets.

Figure 3-20 Smoke detector

Table 3-31 Smoke detector technical specifications

Item Specifications

Operating voltage 9–27 V

Alarm current < 20 mA

Indication Monitoring: The red indicator blinks

once every 3 to 8 seconds.
Alarm reporting: The red indicator is
steady on.

Operating temperature –10°C to +55°C

Ambient humidity ≤ 95% RH

Dimensions (H x W x D) 31 mm x 75 mm x 51 mm (with the

base)

Weight 50 g

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 56

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

3.4.3.3 Video Management System

3.4.3.3.1 Camera
The C3220 camera is a two-megapixel infrared zoom dome camera that can be
ceiling-mounted.

Figure 3-21 C3220 camera

Table 3-32 C3220 camera technical specifications

Item Specifications

Image sensor 1/2.7'' two-megapixel progressive scan CMOS

Minimum illumination ● Color: 0.002 lux (F1.2, AGC ON, 1/30s shutter
speed)
● Black/White: 0.0005 lux (F1.2, AGC ON, 1/30s
shutter speed); 0 lux (infrared illuminator
enabled)

Wide dynamic range 120 dB

Focal length 2.8–12 mm

Video compression H.265/H.264/MJPEG

standard

Maximum resolution 1920×1080

Power supply 12 V DC, PoE

IP rating IP67

Vandal resistant rating IK10

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 57

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

3.4.3.3.2 IVS1800

Figure 3-22 Appearance

Table 3-33 Performance specifications

Categ Item IVS1800-D08 IVS1800-B08 IVS1800-C08-04T IVS1800-C08-04T
ory (64CH) (64CH) (16CH) (64CH)

Devic Networ 64-channel 1080p, 64-channel 16-channel 64-channel

e k video up to 320 Mbit/s 1080p, up to 320 1080p, up to 160 1080p, up to 320
perfor inputs access bandwidth Mbit/s access Mbit/s access Mbit/s access
manc Up to 160 Mbit/s bandwidth bandwidth bandwidth
e access bandwidth Up to 160 Mbit/s Up to 160 Mbit/s
with intelligent access bandwidth access bandwidth
services enabled with intelligent with intelligent
services enabled services enabled

Video 64-channel 1080p, 64-channel 16-channel 64-channel

transfer up to 320 Mbit/s 1080p, up to 320 1080p, up to 160 1080p, up to 320
forwarding Mbit/s forwarding Mbit/s forwarding Mbit/s forwarding
bandwidth bandwidth bandwidth bandwidth
Up to 160 Mbit/s Up to 160 Mbit/s Up to 160 Mbit/s
forwarding forwarding forwarding
bandwidth with bandwidth with bandwidth with
intelligent services intelligent intelligent
enabled services enabled services enabled

Playbac 32-channel 1080p, 32-channel 16-channel 32-channel

k/ up to 160 Mbit/s 1080p, up to 160 1080p, up to 80 1080p, up to 160
Downlo playback Mbit/s playback Mbit/s playback Mbit/s playback
ad bandwidth bandwidth bandwidth bandwidth

Platfo IP 64 cameras to one 64 cameras to 16 cameras to 64 cameras to

rm camera IVS1800 one IVS1800 one IVS1800 one IVS1800
perfor s
manc connect
e ed

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 58

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Table 3-34 Hardware specifications

Categ Item IVS1800-D08 (64CH) IVS1800-B08 (64CH) IVS1800-C08-04T
ory Specifications Specifications (16CH/64CH)
Specifications

Storag Hard disk 8 8 8

e quantity
capacit
y Hard disk SATA3.0 SATA3.0 SATA3.0
port

Hard disk Enterprise-level disks: 4 Enterprise-level disks: Enterprise-level disks: 4

type TB, 6 TB, 8 TB, or 16 4 TB or 6 TB TB, 6 TB, 8 TB, or 10 TB
TB Monitoring-level disks: Monitoring-level disks:
Monitoring-level disks: 4 TB or 6 TB 4 TB or 6 TB
6 TB or 8 TB

Contro Processor Hi3536A Hi3536 Hi3559A

ller
Memory 32 GB eMMC 3 GB (DDR3) 8 GB (DDR4)

Extern Network 2 x 1000M Ethernet Two 10/100/1000 Two 10/100/1000

al port port Mbit/s Ethernet ports Mbit/s Ethernet ports
ports
USB ports Front: 2 x USB 2.0 3 x USB port (one USB Three USB ports (two
Rear: 1 x USB 3.0 2.0 port on the front USB 2.0 ports on the
panel, and one USB front panel and one
2.0 port and one USB USB 3.0 port on the
3.0 port on the rear rear panel)
panel)

Audio input 1 channel, RCA port 1 channel, RCA port 1 channel, RCA port

Audio 1 channel, RCA port 1 channel, RCA port 1 channel, RCA port
output

Alarm port 16-channel Boolean 4-channel alarm input, 4-channel alarm input,
value input and 4- 2-channel alarm 2-channel alarm
channel Boolean value output output
output

Other Power 124 W 98 W 124 W

specifi consumptio
cations n (8 hard
disks
included)

Power 100–240 V AC; 200 W 100–240 V AC; 200 W 110–220 V AC; 200 W
supply

Weight 6.60 kg 6.70 kg 6.60 kg

(hard disks
excluded)

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 59

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Categ Item IVS1800-D08 (64CH) IVS1800-B08 (64CH) IVS1800-C08-04T

ory Specifications Specifications (16CH/64CH)
Specifications

Dimensions 447 mm x 470 mm x 440 mm x 460 mm x 442 mm x 467 mm x

(W x D x 86.1 mm 89 mm 86 mm
H)

NOTICE

When the room temperature of the IVS1800-B08 is poor, an overheat alarm may
be generated when the IVS1800-B08 is fully configured with eight 6 TB hard disks.
You are advised to install a maximum of four 6 TB hard disks at different layers.

3.4.3.4 PAD
● The PAD allows the wireless access from the data center management system.
You can monitor the equipment in the data center and environmental
parameters in real time over the app.
● You are advised not to set Sleep to Never for the PAD, which may shorten the
service life of the screen and battery.

Figure 3-23 PAD

Table 3-35 PAD structural specifications

Item Counter (TB-X605FC) Counter (MatePad SE)

Dimensions (H 243 mm × 164 mm × 7.8 mm 246.9 mm x 156.7 mm x 7.85

x W x D) mm

Weight (with About 460 g About 468 g

the battery)

Touchscreen 10.1-inch, 1920 x 1200 10.4-inch, 2000 x 1200

resolution, IPS screen, and resolution, IPS screen, and
multi-touch multi-touch

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 60

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Item Counter (TB-X605FC) Counter (MatePad SE)

Button/Port ● Touch button + power ● Touch button + power

switch and volume button switch and volume button
● 3.5 mm stereo headphones ● 3.5 mm stereo headset
port jack, LRGM pinout order
● Micro SD card port ● Type-C, supporting USB 2.0
● Micro USB port

3.4.3.5 Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock

The cabinet electronic clasp lock is used to manage access control. It can be
automatically unlocked, or manually locked and unlocked.

Figure 3-24 Cabinet electronic clasp lock

(1) LED indicator (2) DIP switch (3) RJ45 power port

Table 3-36 RJ45 port definitions

No. Pin Description Description

1 RS485+ RS485+

2 RS485– RS485–

3 +12 V power supply +12V DC

4 RS485+ RS485+

5 RS485– RS485–

6 - -

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 61

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

No. Pin Description Description

7 - -

8 Ground GND

Table 3-37 LED indicator status

Indi Color Name Operat Status Description
cato ion
r

RUN Green Module - Blinki ● The door lock is paired

running ng with the host, and the
indicator power supply is normal:
The indicator blinks at
0.5 Hz (on for 1s and
then off for 1s).
● The door lock fails to
pair with the host: The
indicator blinks at 4 Hz
(on for 0.125s and then
off for 0.125s).

Off The power supply is

abnormal.

Press Blinki ● The indicator blinks at

SW. ng super short intervals for
interm 0.5s, and then off for
ittentl 0.5s.
y at ● The indicator blinks at
super super short intervals
short (blinking at 10 Hz, on for
interv 0.05s and then off for
als 0.05s). The cycle lasts for
5s.

ALM Red Alarm - Stead A system failure alarm is

indicator y on generated.

Off The system is normal.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 62

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

3.4.3.6 Door Status Switch

Figure 3-25 Door status switch

Table 3-38 Technical specifications of the door status switch

Item Specifications

Connection method Using wiring terminals

Rated current 500 mA

Opening distance 25 mm ≤ Opening distance ≤ 45 mm

Rated power 10 W

Securing mode Using screws

Distance between mounting holes 40 mm ±0.8 mm

Open-circuit voltage 100 V DC (maximum)

Contact withstand voltage 150 V DC (maximum)

Impedance 0.3 ohm

Switch status Normally open

Outer material White acrylonitrile butadiene styrene

(ABS) engineering plastic

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 63

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

3.4.3.7 (Optional) UIM20A Expansion Module

Figure 3-26 Front panel of the UIM20A expansion module

(1) Indicators and button (2) COM1/AI/DI_1–COM8/AI/ (3) PoE

DI_8

Figure 3-27 UIM20A expansion module rear panel

(1) DIP switch (reserved) (2) COM_OUT (reserved) (3) COM_IN (reserved)

Table 3-39 UIM20A expansion module specifications

Item Specifications

Width 120 mm

Depth 200 mm

Height 43 mm

Operating –30°C to +65°C

temperature

Installation Installed in a 19-inch rack

requirement
s

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 64

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Item Specifications

Environmen RoHS5
tal
protection

Specifications

Table 3-40 UIM20A technical specifications

Item Specifications

Power input Supports the RS485 or PoE power supply.

COM/AIDI (RJ45) ● Supports eight RS485 or AI/DI signal inputs.

● Can connect to sensors such as the smoke detector,
water sensor, door status sensor, and infrared sensor.
● Each port can supply power. Two RJ45 ports share one
12 V DC power supply that is controlled independently.
The maximum output current is 900 mA when the
voltage is 12 V. (COM1/AIDI_1 and COM2/AIDI_2 form a
group, COM3/AIDI_3 and COM4/AIDI_4 form a group,
COM5/AIDI_5 and COM6/AIDI_6 form a group, and
COM7/AIDI_7 and COM8/AIDI_8 form a group).
● The 12 V DC power supply can be switched on or off
and is on by default.

PoE Connects to the ECC800-Pro through the PoE port.

E-label 4.0 Supported

Communications Port
The following table describes the pin assignment for ports COM1/AIDI_1 to
COM8/AIDI_8.

Table 3-41 Pin assignment for ports COM1/AIDI_1 to COM8/AIDI_8

Item Description

Pin Pin 1 RS485+

sequence
Pin 2 RS485–

Pin 3 12V

Pin 4 RS485+

Pin 5 RS485–

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 65

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Item Description

Pin 6 D–

Pin 7 D+

Pin 8 GND

The following table describes the pin assignments for the COM_IN and COM_OUT
ports.

Table 3-42 Pin assignment for the COM_IN and COM_OUT ports
Item Description

Pin Pin 1 RS485+

sequence
Pin 2 RS485–

Pin 3 12 V (input power, supplying power to the module)

Pin 4 RS485+

Pin 5 RS485–

Pin 6 -

Pin 7 -

Pin 8 GND

Indicators and Buttons

Table 3-43 UIM20A indicators

Indicator Status Description

RUN Steady A board application is being loaded.

on

Off The board is not running.

Blinking The ECC800-Pro is successfully registered, and the

slowly software runs properly (blinking at long intervals (0.5
Hz), on for 1s and then off for 1s).

Blinking The communication is interrupted or the ECC800-Pro is

fast unsuccessfully registered (blinking at 2.5 Hz, on for 0.2s
and then off for 0.2s).

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 66

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Indicator Status Description

Blinking Blinking at super short intervals for 0.5s and then off for
0.5s; last 10s (blinking at super short intervals: 10 Hz,
on for 0.05s and then off for 0.05s)

ALM Steady A system fault alarm is raised.

on

Off The system is normal.

Table 3-44 BLINK button description

Function Operation Indicator Status

Description Description

Blinking Press the button for The RUN indicator blinks at super
less than 2s. short intervals for 0.5s and then off for
0.5s; last 10s (blinking at super short
intervals for 10 Hz, on for 0.05s and
then off for 0.05s).

3.4.3.8 WiFi Module

A WiFi module can be installed at the USB port on the main control module
(02312QAA or 02312QAA-001) to provide WiFi signals for devices such as the PAD
to exchange data with the ECC800-Pro.

Figure 3-28 WiFi module

Table 3-45 Technical specifications of a WiFi module

Item Specifications

Wireless IEEE 802.11n, IEEE 802.11g, and IEEE 802.11b

standard

Frequency band 2.4–2.4835 GHz

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 67

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Item Specifications

Wireless 20 dBm (MAX EIRP)

transmission
power

Port USB 2.0 Hi-Speed connector

Voltage range 5.0 V DC±5%

Operating –20°C to +70°C

temperature

Storage –40°C to +90°C

temperature

Relative 10%–90% RH (non-condensing)

humidity

Storage 5%–90% RH (non-condensing)

humidity

Power < 0.8 W

Maximum 3
number of
connected
devices

3.4.3.9 WLAN Antenna

A WLAN antenna can be connected only to the WLAN port on the main control
module (02312QAA-004) to provide WiFi signals for devices such as the PAD to
exchange data with the ECC800-Pro.

Figure 3-29 WLAN antenna

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 68

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Table 3-46 Technical specifications of the WLAN antenna

Item Specifications

Frequency 2400–2500 MHz

range

Voltage < 2.5

standing wave
ratio

Input 50 Ω
impedance

Gain ≥ 3 dBi

Polarization Vertical

Maximum 10 W
power

Connector RP-SMA-J

Maximum 3
number of
connected
devices

3.4.4 NetEco

3.4.4.1 System Overview

With a flexible structure and modular design, the NetEco can manage facilities of
one data center or centrally manage facilities of multiple data centers in different
regions.
The management system provides a GUI to implement comprehensive
management functions based on requirements. The system mainly monitors
following devices:
● Power equipment: smart cooling product, Power distribution module, UPS,
and so on
● Environment equipment: water sensor, temperature and humidity sensor, and
so on
● Video equipment: camera, and so on
● Access control equipment: A standard access management system is
integrated to manage and monitor key information such as door status, card
swiping, and permission setting.
● Standard network management interface: The NetEco provides SNMP
interfaces to communicate with third-party network management systems
(NMSs). The system can be customized to support other protocols for the
access from different devices.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 69

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

3.4.4.2 Server
The NetEco can be deployed on one of the following servers according to the
management capability requirement.

Table 3-47 Server

Model Configuration

TaiShan 200 (Model 2280) 2 x Kunpeng 920 [email protected] GHz, 4 x 32

standard configuration GB memory, 2 x 1.2 TB + 8 x 1.8 TB drives

TaiShan 200 (Model 2180) basic 1 x Kunpeng 920 [email protected] GHz, 2 x 32

configuration GB memory, 2 x 1.2 TB drives

2288X V5-H22X-standard 2 x 5218 [email protected] GHz CPU, 4 x 32 GB

configuration memory, 2 x 1.2 TB + 8 x 1.8 TB SAS drives

2288X V5-H22X-basic 2 x 4208 [email protected] GHz CPU, 2 x 32 GB

configuration memory, 2 x 1.2 TB SAS drives

3.4.4.3 LAN Switch

Select LAN switches based on site requirements.

Table 3-48 LAN switch

Model Maximum Number of Ports

S5331-H24P4XC Twenty-four 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet ports, four

10GE SFP+ ports

S5731-H24P4XC Twenty-four 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet ports, four

10GE SFP+ ports

3.4.5 iManager-M
The iManager-M monitors the status of the entire network on the GIS home page.
After an abnormal site is detected, you can double-click it to access the site
monitoring page. Information about environment, energy consumption, key
devices, alarm, and security monitoring is provided on the site monitoring page
without requiring additional hardware.

● Environment monitoring: Monitors the temperature, humidity, water, and

smoke.
● Key device monitoring: Monitors the UPSs, smart cooling products, and
related power distribution devices in real time, and displays the energy flow
diagram and smart cooling product link diagram.
● Alarm monitoring: Displays site alarm information in real time and quickly
locates device faults.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 70

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

● Security monitoring: Monitors the cabinet door status and cameras in sites.

3.5 Surge Protection and Grounding System

3.5.1 Surge Protection Solution

The Smart Module is mainly used for building equipment rooms. Its power
distribution system is a subsystem of the building power distribution system. Class
I surge protective devices (SPDs) of the power system are provided by the general
low-voltage power distribution room or cabinet of the building.

3.5.2 Grounding Solution

Cabinet Potential Grounding

A general ground bar is installed in the cabinet. Ground terminals of the cabinet
are connected to the ground bar using a ground cable with a minimum cross-
sectional area of 16 mm2.

NOTE

The AC input power is from the upstream power distribution system. The cross-sectional
areas of ground cables are determined according to IEC 60364-5-54.

Cabinet Grounding
● Metal components and parts of cabinets are properly connected. A structural
connection area is protected and applied with antioxidants. An area protected
with painting should ensure proper metal surface contact for two connected
components. The DC resistance is within 0.1 ohm between any two connected
metal components. Use a ground cable to connect two metal components
that cannot be directly connected, such as cabinets and cabinet doors. A cable
for connecting these two metal components has a minimum cross-sectional
area of 6 mm2.
● A ground bar or general ground point is provided in the cabinet for
equipment grounding. The ground bar does not need to be insulated.
● A ground terminal is greater than or equal to M8 in dimensions. A yellow

ground label is attached close to the general ground terminal for

cabinets.
● Connect equipotential cables to metal components without carrying currents
in the module, such as metal doors and windows. Each equipotential cable
has a minimum cross-sectional area of 6 mm2.

3.6 Fire Extinguishing System

A rack-mounted integrated fire extinguishing module can be configured for the
cabinet.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 71

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

● If the cabinet is equipped with a rack-mounted integrated fire extinguishing

module, use the module to put out the fire when a fire extinguishing signal is
detected.
● If no rack-mounted integrated fire extinguishing module is configured, the
cabinet door is automatically opened when a smoke signal is detected in the
cabinet. Then the fire extinguishing system of the building is used to put out
the fire.

Table 3-49 Technical specifications of the integrated rack-mounted fire

extinguishing module
Item Specifications

Storage pressure (at ≤ 1.6 MPa

20°C)

Operating Operating 0–50°C

environme temperatur
nt e

Storage –40°C to +70°C (excluding the glass bulb)

temperatur
e

Humidity ≤ 95% RH (non-condensing)

Startup mode Glass ball: 68°C

Pipe blasting: 90–110°C

Alarming mode Dry contact signal feedback

Dimensions ≤ 1 U (height) x 700 mm (depth)

3.7 Integrated Cabling System

A cable tray is used inside a cabinet to route cables from the front to the rear.

Cable Tray
A cable tray is used for forward and backward cabling. It uses mounting ears to
facilitate device installation.

Figure 3-30 Cable tray

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 72

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 3 System Architecture

Table 3-50 Cable tray technical specifications

Dimensions (H x W x Weight Space Occupied
D)

43.6 mm x 482.6 mm x 1.89 kg 1U

250 mm

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 73

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

4 Installation Guide

4.1 Installation Preparations

4.1.1 Tools and Instruments

This section lists the tools and instruments required for installation.

Table 4-1 General tools and instruments

Name, Specifications, and Appearance

Protective gloves Marker Steel measuring Level

tape

Step ladder Phillips insulated Flat-head Adjustable torque

torque insulated torque wrench
screwdriver screwdriver
(M6/M8) (M6/M8)

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 74

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Name, Specifications, and Appearance

Adjustable wrench Insulated torque Hex key Laser level

socket wrench
(M6/M8)

Square Electrician's knife Impact tool Heat gun

Needle-nose Diagonal pliers RJ45 crimping Insulation tape

pliers tool

Wire stripper Hydraulic pliers Wire clippers Crimping tool

Multimeter Electroprobe Heat shrink Cable tie

tubing

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 75

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Name, Specifications, and Appearance

Hammer drill Electric Rubber mallet

screwdriver

Table 4-2 Tools and instruments for installing smart cooling products
Name, Specifications, and Appearance

Flashlight Hacksaw Manual pallet Electric balance

truck

Antifreeze gloves Cutter Welding torch Silver welding rod

Oxygen cylinder Acetylene Hot melt device Clamp meter

Pipe bender Insulated gloves Pressure gauge Rubber hose

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 76

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Name, Specifications, and Appearance

Nitrogen Reducing valve Vacuum pump Screw thread

sealant

4.1.2 Installation Environment Check

Ensure that the installation environment meets the requirements before
installation.

Table 4-3 Installation environment checklist

Check Item Specifications Actual Result

Operating Indoor operating temperature □ Passed □ Failed

temperature range: 0°C to 40°C

Operating 5%–95% RH □ Passed □ Failed

humidity

Physical The interior is clean and tidy, □ Passed □ Failed

environment of free from dust and conductive
the equipment pollution.
room

Altitude 0–4000 m (The power is □ Passed □ Failed

derated as described in IEC
62040-3 when the altitude
exceeds 1000 m.)

Floor levelness Allowed deviation: 3 mm/2000 □ Passed □ Failed

mm

Equipment room ≥ 2.6 m □ Passed □ Failed

net height

Equipment room ≥ 10.15 m2 □ Passed □ Failed

area

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 77

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Check Item Specifications Actual Result

Equipment room At least 1200 mm, 1000 mm, □ Passed □ Failed

maintenance and 1000 mm maintenance
clearance clearance should be reserved
from the front door, rear, and
side of the cabinet, respectively.
At least 100 mm clearance
should be reserved from the
wall.

Power system 208–240 V, 1-phase, 50 Hz/60 □ Passed □ Failed

Hz

Water port Condensate drain outlet: Drains □ Passed □ Failed

condensate from the smart
cooling product.

Figure 4-1 Space requirements

NOTE

If the requirements are not met, contact technical support.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 78

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Table 4-4 Recommended circuit breakers

load Recommended Upstream Power Terminal
Cable and Circuit Supply Specifications
Breaker
Specifications

≤ 2.4 kW (Latin Circuit breaker 63 A/2P -

America) specifications

Input power cable 3 x 8 AWG 10 mm2 cord end

specifications (L/N/PE) terminal

≤ 3 kW (Asia, Circuit breaker 63 A/2P -

Africa, and specifications
Europe)
Input power cable 3 x 8 AWG 10 mm2 cord end
specifications (L/N/PE) terminal

NOTE

The customer needs to purchase power cables based on site requirements.

4.1.3 Site Equipment Preparation

● All cabinets and devices have been delivered to the site and checked against
the delivery list.
● Cabinets and devices need to be transported to the specified positions based
on the detailed equipment room layout diagram and unpacked for further
installation.

CAUTION

Pay attention to the following when unpacking batteries:

● Insert an insulated flat-head screwdriver into the gap between the wooden
crate and its top cover. Then pry off the top cover along the external edge of
the cover until the cover can be taken out from the crate.
● Be careful to prevent your hands from being hurt by nails during unpacking.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 79

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

4.1.4 Installation Scenarios

Cabinet Internal Layout

Figure 4-2 Cabinet internal layout (02116410)

Table 4-5 Cabinet components (02116410)

No. Component

(1) ECC800-Pro

(2) Door status sensor

(3) Power distribution subrack

(4) UPS

(5) Lithium battery

(6) Water sensor

(7) Smoke detector

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 80

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

No. Component

(8) T/H sensor

(9) rPDU

Figure 4-3 Cabinet internal layout (02116411)

Table 4-6 Cabinet components (02116411)

No. Component

(1) ECC800-Pro

(2) Power distribution subrack

(3) UPS

(4) Electronic clasp lock

(5) Lithium battery

(6) Integrated air conditioner

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 81

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

No. Component

(7) Water sensor

(8) Smoke detector

(9) T/H sensor

(10) rPDU

Figure 4-4 Cabinet internal layout (02116412)

Table 4-7 Cabinet components (02116412)

No. Component

(1) ECC800-Pro

(2) Power distribution subrack

(3) UPS

(4) Electronic clasp lock

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 82

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

No. Component

(5) Lithium battery

(6) Transformer

(7) Integrated air conditioner

(8) Water sensor

(9) Smoke detector

(10) T/H sensor

(11) rPDU

NOTE

If the IVS, server, and LAN switch are configured, determine their installation positions
based on the site requirements.

4.1.5 Configuration Scenario

Table 4-8 Configuration scenario (02116410)

Item Mandatory or Install Onsite or Connect Onsite Commission

Not Not or Not Onsite or Not

ECC800-Pro Yes No No No

Power Yes No No -
distribution
subrack

UPS2000-H-6 Yes No No No
kVA

Lithium battery Yes Yes Yes Yes

rPDU Yes Yes Yes -

4G antenna Yes Yes Yes Yes

WiFi module No Yes Yes Yes

Smoke detector Yes No No No

T/H sensor Yes Yes Yes No

NOTE
Cables have been
laid out.

Door status Yes No No No

sensor

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 83

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Item Mandatory or Install Onsite or Connect Onsite Commission

Not Not or Not Onsite or Not

Water sensor Yes Yes Yes No

PAD No Yes Yes Yes

Camera No Yes Yes Yes

IVS1800 No Yes Yes Yes

Table 4-9 Configuration scenario (02116411)

Item Mandatory or Install Onsite or Connect Onsite Commission
Not Not or Not Onsite or Not

ECC800-Pro Yes No No No

Power Yes No No -
distribution
subrack

UPS2000-H-6 Yes No No No
kVA

Lithium battery Yes Yes Yes Yes

Smart cooling Yes No No No

product

rPDU Yes Yes Yes The monitoring

rPDU needs to be
commissioned
onsite.

UIM20A No Yes Yes Yes

4G antenna Yes Yes Yes Yes

WiFi module Yes No No No

Smoke detector Yes No No No

T/H sensor Yes Yes Yes No

NOTE
Cables have been
laid out.

Electronic clasp Yes No No No

lock

Water sensor Yes Yes Yes No

PAD Yes Yes Yes Yes

Camera No Yes Yes Yes

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 84

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Item Mandatory or Install Onsite or Connect Onsite Commission

Not Not or Not Onsite or Not

IVS1800 No Yes Yes Yes

Rack-mounted No Yes Yes Yes

integrated fire
extinguishing
module

Table 4-10 Configuration scenario (02116412)

Item Mandatory or Install Onsite or Connect Onsite Commission
Not Not or Not Onsite or Not

ECC800-Pro Yes No No No

Power Yes No No -
distribution
subrack

UPS2000-H-6 Yes No No No
kVA

Lithium battery Yes Yes Yes Yes

Transformer Yes No No No

Smart cooling Yes No No No

product

rPDU Yes Yes Yes No

4G antenna Yes Yes Yes Yes

WiFi module Yes No No No

Smoke detector Yes No No No

T/H sensor Yes Yes Yes No

NOTE
Cables have been
laid out.

Electronic clasp Yes No No No

lock

Water sensor Yes Yes Yes No

PAD Yes Yes Yes Yes

Camera No Yes Yes Yes

IVS1800 No Yes Yes Yes

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 85

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Item Mandatory or Install Onsite or Connect Onsite Commission

Not Not or Not Onsite or Not

Rack-mounted No Yes Yes Yes

integrated fire
extinguishing
module

4.1.6 Personnel Requirements

Only trained and qualified personnel who fully understand basic safety
precautions are allowed to install and operate a modular data center.

CAUTION

The Company will not be liable for any consequence caused by the violation of
this document.

The requirements are as follows:

● Technical personnel from the customer must be trained and understand the
installation and operation methods.
● The number of installation personnel varies based on the project progress and
installation environment. Typically, two to three persons are required.

4.2 Hardware Installation

The angle of door opening by the gas spring is 110°. Ensure that the door opening
angle is less than 110°.

4.2.1 Cabinet Transportation and Unpacking

Context
Unpack and inspect all cabinets, mechanical parts, and components. Check that all
the items are intact and comply with the packing list in the presence of both the
project supervisor and customer.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 86

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

NOTICE

● Only trained personnel are allowed to move the cabinet. Use a forklift to
remove the packed cabinet from the pallet.
● To prevent the equipment from falling over, secure it to a pallet truck using
ropes before moving it. Move the equipment with caution to avoid bumping or
falling, which may damage the equipment.
● After placing the equipment in the installation position, unpack it and take care
to prevent scratches. Keep the equipment stable during unpacking.
● After unpacking, check whether the fastening components and removable
components are loose. If they are loose, notify the carrier and manufacturer
immediately.
● Do not tear down the transparent film from the glass door during
transportation or unpacking. The film will be removed after the entire module
is installed.
● If the installation environment is poor, take dustproof and anti-condensation
measures (for example, use a dust cover, plastic film, or fabric cloth) after
unpacking the equipment to prevent condensation and dust buildup, which
may corrode the equipment.

Procedure
Step 1 Use a pallet truck to transport the cabinet to the installation position.

Step 2 Check that the cabinet package is intact.

Step 3 Cut off and remove the binding straps, and remove the packing.

Step 4 Remove pallets from ordinary cabinets.

NOTE

Ordinary cabinets include IT cabinets, battery cabinets, and network cabinets.

1. Remove the plastic bag and take out the fitting box.
2. Check the cabinet exterior for damage. If any damage is found, notify the
carrier immediately.
3. Check against the packing list that the equipment and fittings are correct and
complete. If some fittings are missing or do not comply with the packing list,
record the information and contact the local branch office of your supplier
immediately.
4. After checking that the cabinet is intact, remove the screw assemblies that
secure the cabinet to the pallet, as shown in Figure 4-5.

NOTICE

Set the screw assemblies aside for they will be used in installation steps.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 87

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-5 Removing an ordinary cabinet

5. Remove the cabinet from the pallet and move the cabinet to the installation
position.

NOTICE

To avoid personal injury, prevent the cabinet from falling over during
transportation.

Step 5 Remove the pallet from the Converged Cabinet.

1. Remove the plastic bag and take out the fitting box, ramps, and sliders.
NOTE

Obtain the paper documents about the UPS from the fitting box.
2. Check the cabinet exterior for damage. If any damage is found, notify the
carrier immediately.
3. Check against the packing list that the equipment and fittings are correct and
complete. If some fittings are missing or do not comply with the packing list,
record the information and contact the local branch office of your supplier
immediately.
4. After checking that the Converged Cabinet is intact, remove the L-shaped
brackets that secure the cabinet to the pallet.
a. Open the front and rear doors of the cabinet, and remove the cabinet
lower sealing plates.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 88

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

b. Remove the L-shaped brackets.

c. Reinstall the cabinet lower sealing plates, and close the front and rear
doors of the cabinet.

Figure 4-6 Removing the cabinet lower sealing plates

Figure 4-7 Removing the L-shaped brackets

Figure 4-8 Installing the cabinet lower sealing plates

NOTE

The middle two screws in the cabinet rear are used to secure the latch.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 89

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

5. Connect the ramps to the rear door side of the pallet and extend the ramps,
and then clamp the sliders at the bottom of the ramps, as shown in Figure
4-9.
NOTE

No ramps are configured for the Converged Cabinet BC1.

Figure 4-9 Installing ramps

6. Raise the six leveling feet to the highest point using an adjustable wrench,
and push the cabinet to the installation position over castors.

CAUTION

Close the front and rear doors of the cabinet before moving it from the pallet.

----End

4.2.2 Installing a Cabinet

Prerequisites
The floor levelness meets engineering requirements.

Context
To position a cabinet, perform the following steps:
1. Determine the position of the cabinet based on the engineering layout
diagram.
2. Place the cabinet at the correct installation position.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 90

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the cabinet position based on the engineering layout diagram.
Step 2 Place the cabinet at the correct installation position.
Step 3 Level the cabinet using a wrench.

NOTICE

● Use a measuring tape to check that the vertical distance between the top of
the 2000 mm high cabinet and the floor is 2000 mm (±3 mm). Then use a level
to check that the cabinet is level.
● If the leveling height of the cabinet does not meet the requirements, the
cabinet cannot be opened or closed properly.

NOTE

● To ensure the cabinet steadiness, adjust all the six anchor bolts at the bottom of the
cabinet in place.
● After leveling the anchor bolts in the first and last rows, use a flat-head screwdriver to
level the anchor bolts in the middle row until they are in close contact with the ground.
● Do not remove the anchor bolts. Otherwise, rework is required if the cabinet height
does not meet requirements.
● Anchor bolt adjustment method: Wrench an anchor bolt clockwise to elevate a cabinet
leg, or wrench an anchor bolt anticlockwise to lower it. The anchor bolts can be
adjusted within a range of 0–8 mm.
● Levelness check standard: Ensure that the cabinet is level in width and depth directions
when leveling the cabinet. Put a level at the bottom of the cabinet in width and depth
directions and check that the air bubble is in the middle between the two lines marked
on the glass tube.

Figure 4-10 Leveling a cabinet

----End

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 91

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

4.2.3 Installing Smart Cooling Product Components

This section applies to 02116411 and 0211642 cabinets.

4.2.3.1 Installing a Drainage Pipe for the Smart Cooling Product

Context
The condensate drainpipe has been installed on the smart cooling product before
delivery. You need to route the drainpipe from the bottom onsite.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the baffle plate from the smart cooling product.

Figure 4-11 Removing the baffle plate

Step 2 Use an electrician's knife to cut a cross in the middle of the rubber plug for the
water pipe hole at the bottom of the cabinet.

Figure 4-12 Cutting the rubber plug

Step 3 Route the drainpipe.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 92

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-13 Drainpipe routed from the bottom

NOTICE

● After routing the water pipe, secure it to the pipe assembly using cable ties,
and seal the cable hole using firestop putty.
● After connecting the drainpipe, check whether the drainage is normal.

Step 4 Install the baffle plate for the smart cooling product.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Before removing the smart cooling product, remove the upper baffle plate and the
side panels on both sides of the cabinet.

4.2.3.2 Installing Remote T/H Sensors for the Smart Cooling Product

Context
The T/H sensors need to be installed on the right post of the 33 U position on the
front door and 10 U position on the rear door.

Procedure
Step 1 Install T/H sensors.
1. Open the front and rear doors of the cabinet.
2. Unpack two T/H sensors and attach them to the cabinet posts.
NOTE

The installation positions of the T/H sensors can be adjusted as required.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 93

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Step 2 Set the DIP switch address of the T/H sensor on the front door to 2 and that of
the T/H sensor on the rear door to 1.

Table 4-11 DIP switch settings on T/H sensors

Address DIP Switch Sequence No.

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

NOTICE

The default address of T/H sensors purchased from Huawei is 1.

Step 3 Insert the pre-routed cables into the ports on the T/H sensors on the front and
rear door.s

----End

4.2.4 Installing Power Supply and Distribution Devices

4.2.4.1 Installing Lithium Batteries

Context

DANGER

● Assign at least three persons or use a lifting trolley to move a battery module.
When using a lifting trolley to move a battery module on the aisle, adjust the
trolley angle to facilitate installation.
● If you use a lifting trolley to install a battery module, the center of gravity of
the module is on the guide rails when the module is pushed beyond the
warning line. You can lower the tabletop of the lifting trolley to separate the
module from the tabletop, and then push the module inwards. Doing so
prevents the front panel of the battery module from colliding with the lifting
trolley.
● If you use a lifting trolley to remove a battery module, the center of gravity of
the module is on the trolley when more than half of the module is pulled out.
You can raise the tabletop of the lifting trolley to separate the module from the
guide rails, and then pull the module outwards. Doing so prevents the tail of
the battery module from colliding with the front panel of the battery module
on the lower layer.
● Install the battery modules from the bottom up to prevent falling over due to
imbalance.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 94

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

NOTICE

● The maximum height of rack-mounted battery modules is 1.5 m.

● The rack depth must be at least 600 mm.
● Due to the limitation of battery modules, it is recommended that the distance
between the door beam and the guide rails be less than or equal to 200 mm.

CAUTION

Ensure that lithium batteries are from the same manufacturer and of the same
model. Batteries of the same batch are recommended.

● For the 02116410 cabinet, install the lithium battery at the 2 U or higher
position in the cabinet.
● For the 02116411 cabinet, install the lithium battery at the 11 U or higher
position in the cabinet.
● For the 02116412 cabinet, install the lithium battery at the 14 U or higher
position in the cabinet.
● One lithium battery occupies 3 U space.

Procedure
Step 1 Push a lithium battery into the cabinet and secure it.

Figure 4-14 Installing a lithium battery

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 95

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

NOTICE

● The lithium battery weighs about 43 kg. Check the load-bearing capability of
the rack tray before installation.
● The lithium battery is 396 mm deep. Check the depth of the rack before
installation.
● The lithium battery can be installed in a 19-inch rack with guide rails and a
tray. Check whether the load-bearing capability meets requirements.
● If multiple lithium batteries are installed, certain clearances should be reserved.
The space for each lithium battery should be at least 3 U. The lithium batteries
cannot be directly stacked or vertically placed.
● Install lithium batteries from bottom to top.

Step 2 Install the protective covers for the positive and negative poles of the lithium
batteries.
Step 3 Install other lithium batteries in the same way.

----End

4.2.4.2 (Optional) Installing Busbars

Context
● If there is more than one lithium battery, install busbars.
● For the 02116410 cabinet, install the busbars at the 2 U and 3U positions in
the cabinet.
● For the 02116411 cabinet, install the busbars at the 17 U and 18 U positions
in the cabinet.
● For the 02116412 cabinet, install the busbars at the 20 U and 21 U positions
in the cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Install busbars.
1. Open the cabinet rear door.
2. Install floating nuts at the busbar installation position.
3. Secure the busbar to the installation position using screws.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 96

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-15 Installing busbars

NOTE

This step describes only the installation method. The actual appearance and cabinet
interior layout may vary.

----End

4.2.4.3 Installing rPDUs

Context
● For the 02116410 cabinet, one full-height vertical non-intelligent rPDU is
installed in the left at the rear of the cabinet.
● For the 02116411 cabinet, two horizontal rPDUs are installed. Intelligent
rPDUs and non-intelligent rPDUs are supported. Non-intelligent rPDUs are
installed at the 11 U and 13 U positions at the rear of the cabinet. Intelligent
rPDUs are installed at the 10–11 U and 12–13 U positions at the rear of the
cabinet.
● For the 02116412 cabinet, two horizontal non-intelligent rPDUs are installed
at the 16 U and 18 U positions at the rear of the cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 (Optional) Open the rear door of the cabinet and install floating nuts in the rPDU
installation position.
Step 2 Secure the rPDU using screws.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 97

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-16 Installing a full-height vertical rPDU (02116410)

Figure 4-17 Installing a horizontal non-intelligent rPDU (02116411 & 02116412)

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 98

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-18 Installing a horizontal intelligent rPDU (02116411)

NOTE

This step describes only the installation method. The actual appearance and cabinet interior
layout may vary.

----End

4.2.5 Installing Monitoring Devices

4.2.5.1 Device Layout

Figure 4-19 Monitoring device layout

NOTE

You can adjust the installation position based on site requirements.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 99

FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

4.2.5.2 Installing the SIM Card and Antenna

If a subscriber identity module (SIM) card and an antenna are configured, perform
the following steps to install them.

Procedure
Step 1 Record the positions of the signal cables connected to the panel of the ECC800-
Pro main control module, and then disconnect the signal cables.

Step 2 Remove the ECC800-Pro main control module, and then insert the SIM card into
the left slot of the ECC800-Pro main control module.
NOTE

The SIM card needs to support LTE, WCDMA, or GSM.

Figure 4-20 Removing the ECC800-Pro main control module

Figure 4-21 Installing a SIM card

Step 3 Reconnect the signal cable to the panel of the ECC800-Pro main control module
based on the recorded position.

Step 4 Install the antenna.

1. Attach the 4G antenna and WLAN antenna to the middle of the cabinet top.
2. Route the 4G antenna and WLAN antenna cables into the cabinet through the
signal cable hole at the top of the cabinet and then to the appropriate ports
on the ECC800-Pro.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 100
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-22 Antenna cable routing

3. Connect the 4G antenna and WLAN antenna cables to the antenna ports on
the ECC800-Pro.

Figure 4-23 Installing an antenna cable

----End

4.2.5.3 Installing a PAD

Context
The PAD needs to be installed on the door of the Converged Cabinet.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 101
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-24 PAD installation position

(1) PAD installation position

Procedure
Step 1 Adjust the width and height of the PAD support to match the dimensions of the
PAD to be installed.

Figure 4-25 Adjusting screws

(1) Adjustment screws

Step 2 Remove nuts from the PAD support, insert the support into the mounting holes on
the cabinet front door, and reinstall the nuts to secure the support to the front
door.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 102
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-26 Removing the nut

Step 3 Route the PAD power cable to the cable hole in the PAD support and connect the
cable to the PAD.
Step 4 Adjust the feet above the PAD support and clamp the PAD to the PAD support.

NOTICE

Ensure that the PAD is installed securely and reliably.

Figure 4-27 Installing a PAD

Step 5 Install the PAD cable.

1. (Optional) If the PAD BOM number is 53010KXA, connect the cable from the
ECC800-Pro USB port to the PAD charging port.
2. (Optional) If the PAD BOM number is 53013YDR, clamp the socket connector
to the guide rail at the rear of the power distribution subrack, secure the end
fastener of the socket connector, and connect the cable between the fuse
holder and the socket connector. Connect the adapter delivered with the PAD,
connect the extension cable, and bind the cable. Connect the delivered power
cable and extension cable to the PAD support, bind the redundant cables to
the PAD, and connect the power cable to the charging port on the PAD.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 103
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-28 PAD cable routing (cabinet rear door)

(1) PAD power cable (2) L cable (3) Socket converter

(4) PAD adapter (5) N cable

Figure 4-29 PAD cable routing (cabinet front door)

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 104
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

NOTICE

Screen-on for a long time is not recommended. Otherwise, the service life of the
PAD will be affected.

----End

4.2.5.4 Installing Cabinet T/H Sensors

Context
The installation positions of the T/H sensors can be adjusted as required.

Procedure
Step 1 Unpack T/H sensors and attach them to the cabinet posts.
● For the 02116410 cabinet, a T/H sensor is installed on the right post of the 40
U position on the front door of the cabinet.
● For the 02116411 or 02116412 cabinet, two T/H sensors are installed on the
right post of the 39 U position on the front door and 37 U position on the
rear door of the cabinet.

Step 2 Set the DIP switches on the T/H sensors.

● For the 02116410 cabinet, set the DIP switch address of the T/H sensor on the
front door to 2.

Table 4-12 DIP switch settings on T/H sensors

Address DIP Switch Sequence No.

1 2 3 4 5 6

2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

● For the 02116411 or 02116412 cabinet, set the DIP switch address of the T/H
sensor on the front door to 2 and that of the T/H sensor on the rear door to
1.

Table 4-13 DIP switch settings on T/H sensors

Address DIP Switch Sequence No.

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

Step 3 Insert the pre-routed cable into the port on the T/H sensor.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 105
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

● For the 02116410 cabinet, insert the pre-routed cable into the port on the T/H
sensor.
● For the 02116411 or 02116412 cabinet, insert the pre-routed cables into the
two ports on the T/H sensors at the rear door, and insert the pre-routed
cables into one port on the T/H sensors respectively at the front door.

----End

4.2.5.5 Installing an Electrode Water Sensor

Procedure
Step 1 Place the water sensor on the floor under the cabinet.

Step 2 Use an electrician's knife to cut a cross in the rubber plug for the cable hole at the
bottom of the cabinet.

Step 3 Route the water sensor cable through the cable hole at the bottom of the cabinet,
and connect the cable to the water sensor cable connected to the ECC800-Pro.

Figure 4-30 Routing a signal cable

NOTE

This step shows only the cable route. The actual cabinet layout may vary.

----End

4.2.5.6 (Optional) Installing a UIM20A Expansion Module

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 106
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Context
● If the intelligent rPDU is configured, install the UIM20A expansion module.
● It is recommended that the UIM20A expansion module be installed at the 37
U position at the rear of the cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Install floating nuts in the mounting holes on the UIM20A expansion module.

Figure 4-31 Installing floating nuts

Step 2 Secure the UIM20A expansion module to the cabinet by tightening the screws on
the left and right mounting ears clockwise.

Figure 4-32 Installing a UIM20A expansion module

----End

4.2.5.7 (Optional) Installing a Server

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the installation position of the server and check whether floating nuts
are installed. If not, install them first.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 107
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-33 Installing a floating nut

Step 2 Install guide rails.

Figure 4-34 Installing guide rails

1. Place a guide rail horizontally at the installation position in the cabinet.

2. Tighten the screws to secure the guide rail.
3. Repeat the preceding steps to install the other guide rail.

Step 3 Arrange at least two people to lift the server, place the server on the guide rails,
and push it into the cabinet.

Step 4 When the two mounting ears on the server contact the mounting bars on the
rack, tighten the captive screws on the mounting ears to secure the server.

Figure 4-35 Installing a server

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 108
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Step 5 Connect the server power cable.

1. Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
2. Connect one end of the power cable to the cable port on the AC power
module of the server.

Figure 4-36 Connecting the power cable

3. Use a hook-and-loop fastener to secure the power cable.

Figure 4-37 Securing the power cable

4. Route the power cable along the cable tray neatly, use cable ties to bind the
power cable, and use diagonal pliers to trim off the excess of the cable ties.

----End

4.2.5.8 (Optional) Installing a Camera

Prerequisites
● A camera and tools for installing it have been prepared.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 109
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

● The network cable used for camera communication has been prepared.

Context
The camera and its mounting plate need to be installed on the top of the front
door of the end cabinet.

Preparations
Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver

Materials: SD card, camera

Procedure
Step 1 (Optional) Install an SD card.
1. Remove the transparent cover using an insulated Phillips screwdriver.

Figure 4-38 Removing the transparent cover

2. Gently insert the SD card into the SD card slot.

Figure 4-39 Installing an SD card

Step 2 Route the camera cable through the top of the cabinet.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 110
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Step 3 Align the mounting holes in the camera base with those in the mounting plate,
and screw the camera to the mounting plate.

Figure 4-40 Installing a camera base

(1) Cable outlet

Step 4 Install the mounting plate with the camera at the top of the front door of the end
cabinet, as shown in Figure 4-41.

Figure 4-41 Installing the camera mounting plate

Step 5 Use an insulated Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on both sides of the
lens, adjust the surveillance angle, and tighten the screws to 0.6 N·m.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 111
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-42 Adjusting the camera

NOTICE

● By default, the camera is horizontally installed, and the surveillance video is

displayed horizontally. During the installation, adjust the surveillance angle to
avoid video image rotation after the installation.
● When adjusting the surveillance angle, pay attention to the position of the
illuminator to prevent the illuminator from being blocked.

NOTE

The camera features a three-axis design. The camera can be adjusted by –175° to +180°
horizontally, and the lens can rotate –175° to +180° and be adjusted by 0° to 65° vertically.

Step 6 Align the transparent cover with the screw holes on the base, close the
transparent cover, and use an insulated Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws
to 0.8 N·m.

Figure 4-43 Installing the transparent cover

Step 7 Connect the camera monitoring cable. Connect one end of the network cable to
the network port on the camera and the other end to the LAN2/POE port on the
ECC800-Pro.
NOTE

Other cables of the camera do not need to be connected but should be insulated.

----End

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 112
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

4.2.5.9 (Optional) Installing a LAN Switch

Procedure
Step 1 Locate the LAN switch installation position in the cabinet, and install guide rails
and floating nuts.
Step 2 Install the mounting ears delivered with the LAN switch and secure the LAN
switch to the rack rails at the front of the cabinet.
NOTE

This section describes only the installation method. The actual product appearance may vary.

Figure 4-44 Installing a LAN switch

Step 3 Connect the LAN switch power cable to the rPDU.

Step 4 Connect a port on the LAN switch to the WAN1 port on the ECC800-Pro using a
network cable.
Step 5 Insert a power module into the power slot of the LAN switch, and tighten the
captive screws on the power module panel.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 113
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-45 Installing a power module for a LAN switch

----End

4.2.5.10 Installing an IVS1800

Context
By default, the IVS1800 is delivered without disks. After the IVS1800 is delivered to
the site, install hard disks as required and then install the IVS1800 in the cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Install hard disks.
1. Use a PH2 screwdriver to remove the two black screws on the rear of the
chassis cover, and take off the chassis cover.

Figure 4-46 Removing the chassis cover

2. Remove two black screws on each side of the chassis and the silvery white
one on top of the hard disk tray, raise the hard disk tray by 45 degrees, and
take out the upper and then lower layers of hard disk tray.

Figure 4-47 Removing the hard disk tray

3. Place the hard disks with ports facing upwards and align the screw holes on
the hard disk tray with the hard disks and fasten the screws. Before the
installation, ensure that the fastener of the hard disk tray is on a different side
from the hard disk port, as shown in the lower left figure.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 114
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-48 Installing hard disks

4. Insert the hard disk tray back at 45 degrees with the opening of its locking
buckle facing downwards, hold the screw in the red-framed part to lower the
hard disk tray until it is level, and fasten the black screws on the left and right
sides and the white screw on the top.

Figure 4-49 Fastening the screw on the panel and the screws on the hard disk
tray

5. Connect data and power cables to hard disks. Connect hard disk cable ports
0–3 to hard disks on the lower-layer hard disk tray and ports 4–7 to hard disks
on the upper-layer, as shown in the lower left figure.

Figure 4-50 Connecting data and power cables to hard disks

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 115
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

6. Close the chassis cover, and use a PH2 screwdriver to fasten the rear screws.

Figure 4-51 Closing the chassis cover

Step 2 Install the device.

NOTE

● Before installing the IVS1800 in a cabinet, install guide rails to hold the device. If guide
rails have been installed in the cabinet, check whether they match the device and
whether they block the air intake or exhaust vents of the chassis as the fan is located on
the side. If the vents are blocked, change the guide rails.
● Guide rails that can be adjusted from 500 mm to 800 mm are provided for additional
purchase if required for IVS1800 installation.
● Do not attach rubber feet on the IVS1800 to save space during cabinet installation.
1. Install cage nuts (two at the front and three at the back) to fix the guide rail
at the proper position in the cabinet, as shown in the lower left figure. The
lower right figure shows how to install cage nuts. Insert a cage nut into the
square hole from the inside of the cabinet and clamp it to the lower frame of
the square hole. Use a mounting bar to pull the cage nut until it clamps the
upper frame of the square hole.

Figure 4-52 Installing a cage nut

2. Install guide rails. Horizontally place a guide rail to the installation location
through the positioning block at the front of the guide rail and the
positioning hook at the rear of the guide rail. Fasten four M6 screws (two on
each side) to fix the front end and six M6 screws (three on each side) to fix
the rear end, as shown in the lower right figure.

CAUTION

Before installing a guide rail, check the (F/L, F/R) labels on the guide rail to
identify whether it is for the left or right and which part is the front or rear.
F/L indicates the front end of the left guide rail, and F/R indicates the front
end of the right guide rail.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 116
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-53 Installing a guide rail

3. Install a filler panel for guide rails. Fasten the M6 screws to install the filler
panel for the guide rails.

Figure 4-54 Installing a filler panel for guide rails

4. Install the cage nuts that secure the IVS1800. The cage nut installation
locations are the first and sixth holes along the guide rails, as shown in the
following figure.

Figure 4-55 Installing cage nuts

5. Install mounting ears. Use a PH2 screwdriver to secure the mounting ears to
both sides of the front panel of the device with four screws on each side.
When the device is near the front door of the cabinet, fasten screws in hole
groups 1 and 2; when the device is near the rear door, fasten screws in hole
groups 2 and 3.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 117
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-56 Installing mounting ears

6. Install the IVS1800 in the cabinet. Lift the device from both sides and carefully
position it at the front of the cabinet. Lift the device slightly above the guide
rails, gently place it on the guide rails, and then slide it into the cabinet until
the mounting ears of the subrack contact the mounting bars at the front of
the cabinet.
7. Thread M6 screws (prepared by the customer) through two slotted holes on
each mounting ear. Fasten the M6 screws using a Phillips screwdriver to fix
the mounting ears on the front mounting bars of the cabinet, as shown in the
lower right figure.

Figure 4-57 Securing the device

Step 3 Power on the device.

1. Turn on the power switch.
2. Check the indicators on the front panel of the device for its running status.

----End

4.2.6 (Optional) Installing a Rack-mounted Integrated Fire

Extinguishing Module

Context
● For the 02116411 or 02116412 cabinet, configure a rack-mounted integrated
fire extinguishing module.
● If no cable tray is installed above lithium batteries, install the rack-mounted
integrated fire extinguishing module at the 1 U position above the lithium

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 118
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

batteries. If a cable tray is installed above lithium batteries, install the module
at the 1 U position above the cable tray.

Procedure
Step 1 (Optional) Move the guide rail to the installation position of the rack-mounted
integrated fire extinguishing module.
NOTE

● Guide rails have been installed at the 24 U position of the cabinet.

● Perform this operation when the rack-mounted integrated fire extinguishing module is
not installed at the 24 U position.

Step 2 Secure the rack-mounted integrated fire extinguishing module.

Figure 4-58 Installing a rack-mounted integrated fire extinguishing module

Step 3 Connect the communications cable of the rack-mounted integrated fire

extinguishing module to AIDI_2 on the ECC800.

----End

4.3 Cable Routing

4.3.1 System Cabling Rules

Attaching Cable Labels

NOTICE

A cable label must be consistent with the corresponding cabinet number.

Find the corresponding cable based on the wiring diagram in the cable fitting bag,
and attach the corresponding cable label taken out from the cable fitting bag to
both ends of the cable by wrapping the ends.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 119
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

NOTE

The cable labels must completely wrap the cable without wrinkles.

Attach the cable labels 20 mm away from the plug except for special
circumstances. For example, a label shall not be attached to the bending part of a
cable or attached in some positions that may affect cable installation. If a label
conflicts with a cable tie, attach the label to the outer side of the cable tie.

Attach labels to both ends of a cable.

Requirements for Neatly Routing and Binding Cables

To route and bind cables in an appealing way, follow these rules:

1. Neatly organize exterior cables in a large bundle of cables and prevent cable
tangles that are avoidable, as shown in Figure 4-59.

Figure 4-59 Neatly organizing cables

2. Keep a large number of cables neat and appealing in a cabinet by using cable
organizers. Move the excess parts of cables in unnoticeable positions, as
shown in Figure 4-60.

Figure 4-60 Cable organizer

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 120
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

3. Route and lay out a large number of cables in different areas to ensure neat
cabling and facilitate cable search and maintenance.
4. Route several flat cables along the same path and then overlap them as one.
5. Arrange cables on distinct layers and prevent cable tangles that are avoidable
when cables in different colors are bound together, as shown in Figure 4-61.
Also comply with these rules when cables of different thickness are bound
together. Arrange cables by thickness when arrangement by thickness
conflicts with arrangement by color.

Figure 4-61 Binding cables in different colors

Cable Spacing Requirements

Comply with the following requirements if possible to lay out different types of
cables:
1. Separate AC and DC power cables from diverse non-shielded signal cables.
Keep the cable spacing greater than 100 mm or use grounded metal for
isolation purposes. Do not bind the cables together. Preferentially route the
cables along different sides of cabinets.
2. You are advised to route network cables and optical cables separately.

Safety and Reliability Requirements for Routing and Binding Cables

1. Unless otherwise specified in a design file, ensure that the bend radius (R) of
a cable meets the following requirements:
– Common cable: R ≥ 3d
– Optical cable: R ≥ 40 mm
NOTE

R indicates the bend radius, and d indicates the cable diameter.

2. Reserve slack at cable connection positions to facilitate connection and
disconnection and to prevent stress. Do not leave the cables tight and prevent
connector misalignment, as shown in Figure 4-62.

Figure 4-62 Cable connection positions

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 121
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

3. Before installing a semi-flexible cable, use a dedicated tool to curve the cable.
Do not curve the cable while holding the cable connector by hand.
4. If a number of wire terminals are connected to a multi-point connector,
provide slack and arrange them neatly to prevent stress on certain wires, as
shown in Figure 4-63.

Figure 4-63 Cable connections

5. Protect cable holes in a metal kit with grommet strips. Alternatively, ensure
that the holes are rounded, free from burrs or sharp edges.
6. Keep cables far away from heat sources such as radiators and heat vents. If
unavoidable, take heat resistant measures.
7. Keep cables far away from operating components such as fan blades and do
not bind cables to an airflow path of fans.
8. Prevent rotating components such as doors from squeezing or pulling cables.

Cable Binding Requirements

Bind cables reliably along the route and ensure that the binding interval meets the
requirements in Table 4-14.

Table 4-14 Cable binding interval

Cable Diameter (mm) Binding Interval (mm)

< 10 150

10–30 200

> 30 300

1. Bind cables with a moderate force and ensure that cables are not misshapen
to prevent compromising the signal quality.
2. After binding cables, cut off the excess parts of cable ties and trim away any
burrs, as shown in Figure 4-64.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 122
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-64 Cutting off the excess part of a cable tie

3. Do not use cable ties at a place where the cables are bent. Otherwise, the
cable cores may break due to strong stress, as shown in Figure 4-65.

Figure 4-65 Binding cables in a bending area

4. Ensure that the cable ties are wrapped and secured in the same direction and
do not generate interference with subsequent operations, as shown in Figure
4-66.

Figure 4-66 Direction for securing cable ties

4.3.2 Grounding the Smart Module

1. Connect the ground point in the cabinet to the main ground bar.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 123
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

2. Connect the main ground bar in the cabinet to the floor ground bar or
collective ground bar.

Figure 4-67 Cabinet main copper bar for grounding (02116410)

Figure 4-68 Cabinet main copper bar for grounding (02116411 & 02116412)

4.3.3 Cable Connections to the Power Supply and Distribution

System

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 124
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

4.3.3.1 Cable Routing Description

Figure 4-69 Cable holes at the top of the cabinet (02116410)

(1) Power cable holes (2) Signal cable holes

Figure 4-70 Cable holes at the top of the cabinet (02116411 & 02116412)

(1) Holes for pipes of smart (2) Signal cable holes (3) Power cable hole
cooling products

Wire bushings are installed at the cable outlets of the cabinet for ease of cable
routing. Cut a cross in the middle of a wire bushing using an electrician's knife, as
shown in Figure 4-71.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 125
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-71 Cutting a cross in a wire bushing

Cables can be bound to the side panels and mounting bars of the cabinet.

4.3.3.2 Connecting Cabinet Input Power Cables

Context
The power distribution subrack position in the cable connection description is for
reference only. The actual position may vary.

Procedure
Step 1 (Optional) Connect input power cables to the PDU.
1. (Optional) Remove the transparent protective panel at the rear of the PDU.
2. Connect input power cables to the PDU.

Figure 4-72 Connecting input power cables to the PDU (02116410)

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 126
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-73 Connecting input power cables to the PDU (02116411 &
02116412)

----End

4.3.3.3 Connecting rPDU Cables

4.3.3.3.1 Connecting rPDU Power Cables

Context
If the rPDU is not configured with industrial connectors, connect the rPDU cables.

Preparations
Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, flat-head screwdriver, diagonal pliers,
protective gloves

Material: cable tie

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the rPDU cables.

NOTICE

● If rPDU cables have been connected onsite, go to Step 2.

● Connect cables to the rPDU based on the type of the rPDU and the silk screen
on the wiring port. The following cable connection is for reference only.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 127
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-74 Connecting rPDU cables

Step 2 Take out the rPDU cables and connect the cord end terminals of the power cables
to the ports in the power distribution subrack.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 128
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-75 Connecting power cables to a full-height vertical non-intelligent rPDU

(02116410)

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 129
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-76 Connecting power cables to a horizontal non-intelligent rPDU

(02116411 & 02116412)

NOTE

● This step shows only the cable routes. The actual appearance and cabinet interior layout
prevail.
● If the cabinet is equipped with an intelligent rPDU, refer to the cable connections for a
horizontal non-intelligent rPDU.

Step 3 Connect other rPDU power cables in the same way.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Before connecting the power plug of a device to the rPDU, loosen the locking
device on the rPDU. After connecting the power plug, tighten the locking device.

4.3.3.3.2 Connecting rPDU Signal Cables

If the cabinet is equipped with an intelligent rPDU, refer to this section.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the LAN1 port on the ECC800-Pro to the PoE port on the UIM.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 130
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Step 2 Connect the signal cables of the intelligent rPDU to the COM1/AIDI_4 and COM2/
AIDI_5 ports on the UIM20A expansion module.

Figure 4-77 Connecting rPDU signal cables

----End

4.3.3.4 Connecting Lithium Battery Cables

Context
● The busbars, batteries, power distribution unit (PDU), and UPS have been
installed.
● If only one battery is configured onsite, battery cables have been preinstalled
in the battery position. If more than one battery is configured onsite, connect
battery cables.
● The actual number of batteries and cabinet layout depend on the onsite
configuration.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect lithium battery power cables.
1. Connect the positive battery terminal to the RTN+ port on the busbar and the
negative battery terminal to the –48 V port on the busbar.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 131
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-78 Connecting cables between lithium batteries and busbars

2. Connect cables between the busbars and the PDU.

Figure 4-79 Connecting cables between the busbar and the PDU

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 132
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

Step 2 Connect communications cables between lithium batteries and the UPS.
1. After lithium batteries are connected in parallel, connect the signal cable to
the COM port on the UPS.
2. Connect signal cables between lithium batteries. Connect signal cables from
the COM_OUT port on the lower lithium battery to the COM_IN port on the
upper lithium battery in sequence.
3. Install a build-out resistor at the COM_OUT port on the last lithium battery.

Figure 4-80 Connecting communications cables between lithium batteries and the
UPS

----End

4.3.4 Connecting IVS Cables

Prerequisites
The required cables have been prepared.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the ground cable to the ground terminal on the device and
the other end to the ground point on the cabinet. An insulated Phillips screwdriver
and M4 screws are required.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 133
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

NOTE

The customer needs to prepare the ground cable.

Step 2 Connect one end of the network cable to any GE network port on the IVS.

Figure 4-81 IVS rear panel

(1) RS485 port (2) Serial port (3) HDMI 2.0 (4) Network (5) GE
port port ACT network port
indicator

(6) Network (7) Power (8) Power (9) Power port (10) Reset
port LINK button switch button
indicator

(11) USB 3.0 (12) HDMI 1.4 (13) Audio (14) Alarm (15) Ground
port port input/output input/output terminal
port port

Step 3 Connect one end of the power cable to the power input port on the power module
and the other end to the rPDU in the cabinet.
NOTE

After connecting the power cable, turn on the power switch on the panel to start the
device.

----End

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 134
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

4.4 Verifying the Installation

Cabinet Installation Check

Table 4-15 Cabinet installation check items

No. Check That Check Result

1 The cabinet position is consistent with the □ Passed □ Failed

equipment room layout diagram.

2 All bolts are tightened, especially the bolts used □ Passed □ Failed
for electric connection. Flat washers and spring
washers are installed properly.

3 The cabinet is clean and free of dust and other □ Passed □ Failed
materials.

4 The cabinet is clean and complies with dustproof □ Passed □ Failed

requirements.

5 The paint on the cabinet exterior is intact. □ Passed □ Failed

Promptly repaint the cabinet exterior if necessary
to prevent corrosion.

6 The cabinet door and lock work properly. □ Passed □ Failed

7 All labels are correct, clear, and complete. □ Passed □ Failed

8 The cabinet has no waste tape, cable ties, paper, □ Passed □ Failed
or packing materials around it.

9 All components are properly installed and no □ Passed □ Failed

component is left onsite.

10 Block empty cable holes using plugs or lids. □ Passed □ Failed

Cable Installation Check

Table 4-16 Cable installation check items

No. Check That Check Result

1 All cable joints are secured properly, especially the □ Passed □ Failed
cable joints between network cables.

2 Exposed parts near the wiring terminals and lugs □ Passed □ Failed
are wrapped in PVC insulation tape or heat
shrinking tubing.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 135
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

No. Check That Check Result

3 The flat washers and spring washers of all wiring □ Passed □ Failed
terminals are securely installed.

4 Cables are bound neatly and cable ties are □ Passed □ Failed
secured evenly and properly.

5 Routed cables should be convenient for future □ Passed □ Failed

maintenance and expansion.

6 All labels at the cable ends are clear. □ Passed □ Failed

7 The excess section of a cable strip is cut evenly. □ Passed □ Failed

8 There is no unnecessary adhesive tape or cable tie □ Passed □ Failed

on cables.

Electrical Installation Check

Table 4-17 Electric installation check items

No. Check That Check Result

1 All ground cables are copper cables. Cable □ Passed □ Failed

diameters are correct. No switches or fuses are
installed on the cables and no short circuit occurs.

2 The ground cable, AC power cables, and internal □ Passed □ Failed

cables are correctly connected and screws are
secured. No short circuit occurs during power
input or output.

3 The smart cooling product input voltage is within □ Passed □ Failed

the range of rated voltage ±10%, and the input
frequency is within the range of rated frequency
±3 Hz.

4 The length of ground cables and power cables is □ Passed □ Failed

correct.

5 Lugs for power cables and PGND cables are □ Passed □ Failed
soldered or crimped securely.

6 Power cables and PGND cables are routed and □ Passed □ Failed
bundled separately from other cables.

7 Lithium batteries are intact, free from damage, □ Passed □ Failed

cracks, and bulges.

8 Lithium batteries are neat and clean, and do not □ Passed □ Failed
leak electrolyte.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 136
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 4 Installation Guide

No. Check That Check Result

9 Lithium battery terminals are upright and free □ Passed □ Failed

from damage, break, and acid leakage.

10 Lithium battery cables are connected correctly. □ Passed □ Failed

11 DIP switches on devices are correctly set. □ Passed □ Failed

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 137
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

5 Power-On Commissioning

5.1 Power-On Commissioning for the Power Supply and

Distribution System
Prerequisites
The installation has been checked.

NOTICE

Configure an upstream protective device that meets the overload and short-circuit
protection requirements for the cabinet. If one power input is overloaded or short-
circuited, the system can switch to the other power input automatically.

Procedure
Step 1 Switch on all SPD circuit breakers.
NOTE

If the surge protection module indicator is green, the SPD is running properly. If the surge
protection module indicator is red, the surge protection module is faulty and must be
replaced immediately.

Step 2 Switch on the power input circuit breaker outside the cabinet to power on the
cabinet.
NOTE

If the green power indicator on the cabinet front panel lights up, the cabinet is powered on
properly.

Step 3 Turn on the general input switch in the Converged Cabinet.

Step 4 Switch on the UPS input circuit breaker.
Step 5 After the UPS starts, set parameters based on site requirements, start the inverter,
and switch on the UPS output circuit breaker.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 138
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Step 6 Switch on the rPDU circuit breakers.

NOTICE

When switching on the circuit breakers, observe whether there is any abnormal
phenomenon, such as sparks.

----End

5.1.1 UPS Power-On Commissioning

5.1.1.1 Checking Before Power-On

● AC power cable colors comply with local regulations.
● The input and output are not short-circuited.
● Cables and terminals are securely connected.
● Battery cables and terminals are connected correctly, and voltages comply
with industry standards.
● The UPSs are properly connected to battery strings.
● Input circuit breakers and load circuit breakers are OFF.
● Power cables and signal cables are correctly identified.
● The phase sequence of the input power is correct.
● Cables are neatly routed and securely bound according to requirements.
● Devices are installed and cables are routed in ways that facilitate
modification, capacity expansion, and maintenance.
● Parallel cables in a parallel system are properly connected.
● Devices are properly grounded.
● The voltage range of the UPS upstream input circuit breaker is 80–280 V AC
(phase voltage), and the rated frequency is 50 Hz/60 Hz.

5.1.1.2 UPS Startup Method

Start the UPS in normal mode using either of the following methods:
Method 1: When the UPS works in bypass mode, hold down the button on the
UPS panel for more than 5s. Release the button when the inverter indicator blinks
and you hear a beep sound. Do not press any button during inverter startup.
When the startup command is successfully delivered, and the inverter indicator is
steady on, the UPS enters normal mode.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 139
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-1 UPS button

Method 2: In bypass mode, choose Configuration > Control > Power-on/off on

the app to start the UPS. After successful startup, the UPS enters normal mode.

Figure 5-2 Powering on/off the UPS on the app

Method 3: On the WebUI, choose Monitoring > UPS System > Running Control
to start the UPS.

Figure 5-3 System Commands & Tests

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 140
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

NOTE

For details about how to start the UPS over the WebUI, see the EN83CTLA SNMP Card User
Manual.

5.1.1.3 Starting a UPS

Figure 5-4 Connecting single-phase input and single-phase output cables (6 kVA)

Starting the UPS Using Mains Power

Step 1 Hold down the MANUAL ON/OFF button on the lithium battery panel for at least
5s and less than 15s to power on the lithium battery.
NOTE

The lithium battery can be activated in the following two modes. After being activated, the
lithium battery switches from sleep mode to disconnected mode.
● Activation through the MANUAL ON/OFF button: Hold down the MANUAL ON/OFF
button on the lithium battery panel for at least 5s and less than 15s.
● Activation through the power port: When one of the lithium batteries connected in
parallel is started and the output voltage of the lithium battery is 43.2–58 V for at least
5s, the other lithium batteries will also be started.

Step 2 Switch on the mains AC input circuit breaker K1 for the UPS. The UPS works in
bypass mode. The sL terminal outputs bypass voltage, and the pL terminal has no
voltage output.

Step 3 If the alarm indicator on the UPS panel is blinking, view the alarm details on the
app and handle the alarm.

Step 4 Select a startup method to start the UPS in normal mode. For details, see the
section "UPS Startup Method."

Step 5 When the UPS runs properly, switch on the UPS AC output circuit breaker Q1 to
supply power to loads.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 141
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

NOTE

To prevent triggering overload protection, start the loads with higher power and then loads
with lower power.

----End

5.1.1.4 UPS Shutdown Method

Shut down the UPS using either of the following methods:

Method 1: Hold down the button on the UPS panel for more than 5s. Release the
button when the inverter indicator blinks and you hear a beep sound. Do not press
any button during inverter shutdown. When the shutdown command is
successfully delivered, and the inverter indicator is off, the UPS shuts down the
inverter output and enters bypass mode.

Method 2: Choose Configuration > Control > Power-on/off on the app to shut
down the inverter. After successful shutdown, the UPS enters the bypass mode.

Method 3: On the WebUI, choose Monitoring > UPS System > Running Control
to shut down the UPS.
NOTE

For details about how to shutdown the UPS over the WebUI, see the EN83CTLA SNMP Card
User Manual.

5.1.1.5 Shutting Down a UPS

Shutting Down the Inverter to Transfer the UPS to Bypass Mode

Select a shutdown method to shut down the UPS by referring to the section "UPS
Shutdown Method."

Shutting Down the Inverter to Transfer the UPS to the No Output State
Step 1 Shut down loads.

Step 2 Select a shutdown method to shut down the UPS by referring to the section "UPS
Shutdown Method." The inverter shuts down, and the UPS transfers to bypass
mode.

Step 3 Hold down the MANUAL ON/OFF button on the lithium battery panel for at least
5s and less than 15s to power off the lithium battery.

Step 4 Switch off the mains AC input circuit breaker K1 and output circuit breaker Q1 of
the UPS. After all indicators turn off and fans stop, the UPS shuts down, and the
loads power off.

----End

5.1.1.6 Cold-Starting the UPS Using Batteries (Single UPS)

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 142
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Cold-Starting the UPS Using Batteries

Step 1 Hold down the MANUAL ON/OFF button on the lithium battery panel for at least
5s and less than 15s to power on the lithium battery.

Step 2 Hold down the UPS button for 3s (the bypass indicator, battery indicator, and
inverter indicator are on at the same time), and the UPS is powered on. After the
UPS initialization is complete (about 10s), the indicator status changes and the
UPS enters the standby state (the WiFi indicator is on and the fault indicator
blinks). Hold down the UPS button for more than 5s, and the UPS enters battery
mode.

Step 3 When the UPS runs properly, switch on the UPS AC output circuit breaker Q1 to
supply power to loads.
NOTE

To prevent triggering overload protection, start the loads with higher power and then loads
with lower power.

----End

5.1.2 Connecting the Lithium Battery Supply

Procedure
Step 1 (Optional) Hold down the MANUAL ON/OFF button on the lithium battery panel
for at least 5s and less than 15s to power on the lithium battery.
NOTE

The lithium battery can be activated in the following two modes. After being activated, the
lithium battery switches from sleep mode to disconnected mode.
● Activation through the MANUAL ON/OFF button: Hold down the MANUAL ON/OFF
button on the lithium battery panel for at least 5s and less than 15s.
● Activation through the power port: When one of the lithium batteries connected in
parallel is started and the output voltage of the lithium battery is 43.2–58 V for at least
5s, the other lithium batteries will also be started.

Step 2 When multiple lithium batteries connected in parallel are powered on, observe the
RUN indicator on each lithium battery panel. Communication is normal if the
indicator is steady on and is not established if it blinks fast. Check the
communications cables between lithium batteries and rectify the fault.

Step 3 When the lithium batteries are communicating with the monitoring module, check
whether the communication is normal. If the RUN indicator on a lithium battery is
steady on, the lithium battery communicates properly with the monitoring
module. If the indicator blinks fast, the communication is interrupted. In this case,
check that the communications cable is properly connected.

Step 4 Observe the lithium battery for 15 mins. Ensure that it is working properly (the
ALM indicator is off and the RUN indicator is steady on).

----End

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 143
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

5.2 Power-On Commissioning for the Cooling System

Prerequisites
Before powering on the outdoor unit, check and upgrade the indoor unit software
version to SmartDC V100R021C10SPC430 (APP:V1.21.10.754) or later. Search for
5000-A013.tar.gz on the technical support website, download the software of the
corresponding model and the ACC Software Upgrade Guide, and upgrade the
software on the PAD or ECC800-Pro.

5.2.1 Powering on Devices

Prerequisites
● Check that the drainpipe is correctly connected, the external thermal
insulation foam is secured, and refrigerant has been filled in the system.
● Check that the smart cooling product circuit breaker in the upstream PDB is
OFF.
● Check that the power cable is correctly connected and that the input voltage
meets requirements.
● Check that the smart cooling product control unit and the ECC800-Pro are
correctly connected.

Procedure
Step 1 Switch on the smart cooling product circuit breaker in the upstream PDB.

NOTICE

The electric heating belt of the crankcase starts working. Before starting the
compressor, ensure that the electric heating belt of the crankcase has been
preheated for more than 12 hours. Otherwise, maintenance is not performed.

Step 2 Commission the system after the electric heating belt of the crankcase has been
preheated for 12 hours.
NOTE

Perform 5.2.2.1 Preparations and Management System Login during the preheating time.

----End

5.2.2 Initial Configuration

You need to log in to the management system before configuring the cooling
system which is commissioned and managed through the ECC800-Pro.

5.2.2.1 Preparations and Management System Login

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 144
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

5.2.2.1.1 Preparations and WebUI Login

Prerequisites
● Computer operating system: Windows 7 or later
● Recommended resolution: 1366 x 768 or higher
● Browser: Chrome or Firefox 32

Procedure
Step 1 Connect a network cable between the PC network port and the WAN1 port
(protected by a security mechanism) on the ECC800-Pro.

Table 5-1 Default IP addresses for the WAN and LAN ports on the ECC800-Pro

Port Default IP Address

WAN1 192.168.8.10

WAN2 192.168.0.10

LAN1 and LAN2 192.168.248.10

NOTICE

● In ECC800-Pro V100R022C10 and earlier versions, the default IP address of the

WAN_1 port is 192.168.1.10.
● The WAN1 port IP address cannot be set to an IP address in any of the
following network segments: 192.168.0.x, 192.168.245.x, 192.168.246.x, and
192.168.248.x.
● IP addresses for the WAN1 and WAN2 ports should not be set in the same
network segment.
● In some customized scenarios, the default IP address for the WAN2 port is
192.168.248.10. The default value may vary.
● The WAN port supports Internet access and the LAN port supports LAN access.
Connect the PC network port to the WAN1 port or LAN port on the ECC800-Pro
based on the access network.

Step 2 Configure the PC IP address and the WAN1 IP address in the same network
segment.

If the WAN1 port IP address is 192.168.8.10, subnet mask is 255.255.255.0, and

default gateway is 192.168.8.1, set the PC IP address to 192.168.8.12, subnet mask
to 255.255.255.0, and default gateway to 192.168.8.1.

Step 3 Set the LAN.

1. (Optional) Open the Chrome browser, go to the Settings page, choose
System, click Open your computer's proxy settings, and deselect Use a
proxy server.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 145
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

2. (Optional) Under Proxy server, deselect Use a proxy server for your LAN.
3. Click Save.

Step 4 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI.

1. Enter https://monitoring IP address (such as https://192.168.8.10) in the
address box of the browser, and then press Enter to access the WebUI login
page.

Figure 5-5 WebUI login page

2. On the login page, enter the preset user name admin and preset password
Changeme, set the language, and click Log In.
NOTE

– After the first login, change the password in time to ensure account security and
prevent unauthorized network attacks, such as data tampering. The Company will
not be liable for any security issues caused by your failure to change the preset
password in time or password loss after changing.
– Change the password of the user account periodically.
– Record and keep the password properly. If you forgot the password, you will be
unable to log in to the WebUI.
– When the event notification is configured and the password retrieval mode is
configured under user management, the password can be retrieved.
– If you do not perform any operation within 10 minutes after logging in to the
system, you will be logged out due to timeout.
– A maximum of three users can log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI at the same time.

----End

5.2.2.1.2 Preparations and App Login

Prerequisites
App operating environment requirements:
● The mobile device runs Android 4.0 or later or HarmonyOS, and the operating
system is not rooted.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 146
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

● The mobile device has sufficient battery reserve.

● You have obtained the IP address of the ECC800-Pro as well as the user name
and password used for WebUI login.
● A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as that of the ECC800-
Pro is prepared, and the PC has connected to port WAN_1 on the ECC800-Pro.

Procedure
Step 1 Download and install the FusionModule app from Huawei AppGallery.
NOTE

Before the installation, ensure that the PAD is connected to the Internet and the network is
running properly.
● Huawei AppGallery installed on the PAD
Log in to the Huawei AppGallery client, search for FusionModule, and tap
Install.
● Huawei AppGallery not installed on the PAD

Table 5-2 Operation methods for the scenario where Huawei AppGallery is
not installed on the PAD or mobile phone
Method Procedure Installation
Verification

Method 1: Install the 1. Log in to Huawei Check that the app icon
app from the AppGallery (https://
Huawei AppGallery appgallery.huawei.co
official website. m/), search for exists on the
FusionModule, and tap PAD desktop.
Install.
2. In the displayed Tip
dialog box, tap Install
AppGallery.
3. The Huawei AppGallery
installation file is
displayed on the
screen. Download and
install the Huawei
AppGallery as
prompted.
4. On the Huawei
AppGallery client,
search for
FusionModule, and tap
Install.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 147
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Method Procedure Installation

Verification

Method 2: Log in to 1. Log in to the ECC800-

the ECC800-Pro Pro WebUI on a PC.
WebUI on a PC and 2. Choose Maintenance >
scan the QR code to App Obtaining. The
install the app. QR code screen is
displayed.
3. Use the PAD to scan
the QR code and follow
the onscreen
instructions to install
the app.

Step 2 Hold down the SW button on the ECC800-Pro for 1s to enable the WiFi function.
NOTE

● The initial password is Changeme after the WiFi function is enabled. The password is
valid only after you hold down the button for the first time to enable the WiFi function.
If you enable the WiFi function on the WebUI, there is no preset password.
● After the WiFi function is enabled, the password for a mobile phone to connect to the
WiFi network is Changeme. When you log in to the app using the PAD, the system
prompts you to change the preset password.
● After you disable the WiFi hotspot function on the WebUI and press the button again,
the WiFi function is still enabled. In this case, the WiFi password is the one you changed
into last time.
● The WiFi function is disabled by default. When you enable the WiFi function, change the
WiFi password to ensure connection security.
● A password that has been used for a long time is more likely to be stolen or cracked.
The risk increases along with the time of use. Change the WiFi password periodically
(recommended: once half a year).

Step 3 (Optional) Enable the WiFi function on the ECC800-Pro WebUI.

1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
2. Choose Monitoring > System > WiFi Converter and click WiFi
Management.
3. Set Enable WiFi to Enable and click Submit.
4. If this is the first time you enable the WiFi function, set WiFi Password and
click OK.
5. Enter the password currently used for logging in to the WebUI and click
Submit.
6. Specify WiFi SSID and WiFi Password and click Submit to change the SSID
and password.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 148
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

NOTE

– If you have set a password when enabling WiFi for the first time, you do not need
to set the password again.
– The WiFi function is disabled by default. When you enable the WiFi function,
change the WiFi password to ensure connection security.
– A password that has been used for a long time is more likely to be stolen or
cracked. The risk increases along with the time of use. Change the WiFi password
periodically (recommended: once half a year).
7. Enter the password currently used for logging in to the WebUI and click
Submit.

Step 4 Log in to the app.

1. Start the PAD app, choose Settings > Network Connection on the login
screen, select WiFi SSID specified on the WebUI, and enter the value of WiFi
Password specified on the WebUI for login.
2. If the Huawei PAD fails to connect to the WiFi network automatically after
the WiFi network is restarted, on the settings screen, choose WLAN > More
Settings to disable WLAN+ or choose WIFI > More Settings to disable WIFI+,
and then reconnect to the WiFi network.
3. On the login screen, choose Settings > Communication IP Settings, and
ensure that the IP address is 192.168.245.10.
4. The user name and login password for the app are the same as those for the
ECC800-Pro WebUI. Specify the user name and password, and tap Login.
NOTE

– After the first login, change the preset password in time to ensure system access
security.
– A password that has been used for a long time is more likely to be stolen or cracked.
The risk increases along with the time of use. Change the password once every three
months.
– It is recommended that you use different user names to log in to both the ECC800-Pro
WebUI and app at the same time. If you use the same user name to log in to the
WebUI and app at the same time, either of them will be forcibly logged out.

----End

5.2.2.1.3 Initial Startup Password Authentication

Context
● The initial startup password authentication is required only during initial
power-on commissioning. If the authentication has been performed
successfully, no authentication is required afterward.
● The startup password needs to be authenticated again when you restore the
default settings on the WebUI or by pressing keys.
● If the startup password authentication is not complete, the ECC800-Pro
WebUI and app cannot be used for commissioning.
● When the system type is changed to FusionModule500/800, the startup
password needs to be authenticated again.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 149
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Record the values of Barcode and Verify Code in the displayed Startup Password
dialog box.
Step 3 Within 24 hours, inform the authorized service engineer of Barcode and Verify
Code to obtain the password. After obtaining the password, enter the password in
the Password text box and click Submit to complete the authentication of the
startup password.
NOTE

● The verification code is valid for 24 hours by default. After the validity period, the
verification code is automatically updated. You can also click to update the verification
code.
● Authorized service engineers can obtain the service authorization code through the app.
For details, see Data Center Facility Deployment Guide.

----End

5.2.2.1.4 (Optional) iManager-M Service Access

The ECC800-Pro can connect to the NetEco only after the NetEco communications
parameters are set on the ECC800-Pro WebUI.

Prerequisites
You have obtained the IP address of the ECC800-Pro as well as the user name and
password used for WebUI login.

Procedure
Step 1 Enter https://monitoring IP address (such as https://192.168.1.10) in the
address box of the browser, and then press Enter to enter the WebUI login page.
Step 2 On the login page, enter the user name and password, select a language, and click
Log In.
NOTE

● If you do not perform any operation within 10 minutes after logging in to the system,
you will be logged out due to timeout.
● A maximum of three users can log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI at the same time.

Step 3 Set parameters.

1. Sites where devices have been powered on:
a. Cloud access through 4G:
i. Choose System Settings > System Parameters. In the Mobile Data
area in the right pane, change Disable of Mobile data control to
Enable.
ii. Choose System Settings > NMS Application > NetEco1
Communication Parameters and select iManager-M for Service
type.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 150
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

iii. Choose System Settings > NMS Application and select the NetEco
tab page. In the Communication Parameters area, retain the
default values of Address type, NetEco domain name, and Port
number, and set Network port for link setup to 4G, and click
Submit.
b. Cloud access through FE:
i. Choose System Settings > System Parameters. In the right pane,
click the Monitor IP tab and enter the DNS server address.
ii. Choose System Settings > NMS Application and select the NetEco
tab page. In the Communication Parameters area, retain the
default values of Address type, NetEco domain name, and Port
number, and set Network port for link setup to WAN1, and click
Submit.
c. After setting the parameters, check whether the dial-up connection is
successful. Choose Home > Mobile Data Info., and check whether the
dial-up connection is set up successfully and check the signal strength.
2. Sites where devices have not been powered on:
a. Cloud access through 4G:
i. Complete the first startup password authentication on the WebUI.
The iManager-M access page is displayed.
ii. Set iManager-M access to Enable and set iManager-M access
mode to 4G.
b. Cloud access through FE:
i. Complete the first startup password authentication on the WebUI.
The iManager-M access page is displayed.
ii. Set iManager-M access to Enable and set iManager-M access
mode to FE.
iii. On the WebUI, choose System Settings > System Parameters >
Monitor IP. Set the DNS server address.

----End

5.2.2.2 Performing Initial Configuration

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the communications
port on the FusionCol5000, and the other end has been connected to the COM2
port on the ECC800-Pro.

Procedure
Step 1 Add the FusionCol5000-A0031.
1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
2. Adding the FusionCol5000-A0031

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 151
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Table 5-3 Adding a smart cooling product

Path Parameter Setting

Choose Device Select Air Conditioner from the drop-

System Attribute down list.
Settings >
Device Device Type Select FusionCol-M from the drop-down
Management list.
and click Add Connect To Select ECC800 from the drop-down list.
Device.
Communicati Select COM2 from the drop-down list.
ons Port NOTE
The setting example indicates that the
FusionCol5000-A0031 is connected to the
COM2 port on the ECC800-Pro. If the
FusionCol5000-A0031 is connected to another
port, enter the number of the connected port.

Device Enter the actual device address of the

Address FusionCol5000-A0031 during operations.
The default address is 1.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the FusionCol5000-A0031 connects to

the ECC800-Pro properly.
– If the connection is normal, click Confirm. The connected devices are
displayed in the Number of connected devices list.
– If the connection is abnormal, check whether the device is properly
connected to the ECC800-Pro, whether the device and the ECC800-Pro are
running properly, and whether the parameter settings are consistent with
the device parameters.
Step 2 Set the running parameters and control parameters for the FusionCol5000-A0031
on the WebUI.
1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
2. Choose Monitoring > Cooling > FusionCol5000-A0031.
3. On the Running Parameters tab page, set smart cooling product running
parameters.
NOTE

On the Running Parameters tab page, you are advised to set Temperature setpoint
to 23°C, Humidity setpoint to 50% RH, Control mode to Cold aisle average value
control, and Cold aisle T/H sensor fault enable and Hot aisle T/H sensor fault
enable to Enable.

4. On the Controls tab page, set the smart cooling product control parameters
(such as on/off control parameters).

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 152
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

CAUTION

After the smart cooling product is shut down, the temperature of the smart
module increases and data running is affected. Exercise caution when
performing this operation.

----End

5.2.3 Commissioning the Cooling System

Prerequisites
Check that the smart cooling product is properly powered on.

NOTICE

Before starting the compressor after power-on, ensure that the electric heating
belt of the crankcase has been preheated for more than 12 hours.

Context
High-quality refrigerant R410A is recommended.

CAUTION

Wear antifreeze gloves when performing refrigerant related operations.

The following are the tools used for commissioning and refrigerant charging:

● Charging tools: pressure gauge (measuring range ≥ 4.0 MPa), rubber hose
(withstand pressure ≥ 4.5 MPa), vacuum pump
● Measurement tool: electronic balance
● Protective tools: insulation gloves, antifreeze gloves, and insulation shoes.
● Other tools: flashlight

To learn the mapping between the saturation pressure and the saturation
temperature of the R410A refrigerant, see Table 5-4.

Table 5-4 Mapping between the saturation pressure and the saturation
temperature for R410A

Saturation Gauge Saturation Gauge Saturation Gauge

Temperatu Pressure Temperatu Pressure Temperatu Pressure
re (°C) (MPa) re (°C) (MPa) re (°C) (MPa)

0 0.7 19 1.31 38 2.21

1 0.73 20 1.35 39 2.27

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 153
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Saturation Gauge Saturation Gauge Saturation Gauge

Temperatu Pressure Temperatu Pressure Temperatu Pressure
re (°C) (MPa) re (°C) (MPa) re (°C) (MPa)

2 0.75 21 1.39 40 2.33

3 0.78 22 1.4 41 2.39

4 0.81 23 1.47 42 2.45

5 0.84 24 1.51 43 2.51

6 0.87 25 1.56 44 2.57

7 0.9 26 1.60 45 2.63

8 0.93 27 1.65 46 2.7

9 0.96 28 1.69 47 2.76

10 0.99 29 1.74 48 2.83

11 1.02 30 1.79 49 2.9

12 1.05 31 1.84 50 2.97

13 1.09 32 1.89 51 3.04

14 1.12 33 1.94 52 3.11

15 1.16 34 1.99 53 3.19

16 1.19 35 2.04 54 3.26

17 1.23 36 2.1 55 3.34

18 1.27 37 2.15 - -

NOTE

1 MPa ≈ 10 bar ≈ 145 psi ≈ 10.2 kgf/cm2

NOTICE

Users include admin (preset password: Changeme) and operator (preset

password: Changeme). To enter the diagnostic mode, log in as user admin.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose Monitoring > Cooling >
FusionCol5000-A0031. The page for commissioning smart cooling products is
displayed.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 154
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

NOTE

If no manual operation is performed within 25 seconds after you click On, the device will
automatically run following the preset logic, and the compressor and internal and external
circulation fans will also run according to the environment.

Step 2 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Power on/off to ON, and click
Submit.

----End

Exception Handling
Step 1 Check that the T/H control mode and T/H set point are properly set.
Step 2 Check that the current time is correctly set.
Step 3 Check that the return air filter is installed in the correct direction.

----End

5.3 Management System Power-On Commissioning

Prerequisites
● The management system has passed the initial startup password
authentication and can be logged in to properly.
● If the login and password authentication have not been performed for the
first time, see 5.2.2.1 Preparations and Management System Login.

5.3.1 How Do I Set the Date and Time?

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > System Parameters > Time.
Step 2 Set the time zone, date, and time, or click Obtain Local Time. Then, click Submit.
Step 3 (Optional) If you want to use the NTP server for time synchronization, select NTP
server sync. Set NTP primary server IP, Whether the NTP master server is
authenticated, Key ID, and Key, and click Test to check whether the test is
successful. Set NTP backup server IP, Whether the NTP backup server is
authenticated, Key ID, and Key, and click Test to check whether the test is
successful. Enter Port number and Sync interval (min), and click Submit.

----End

5.3.2 Adding a Southbound Device

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Device Management > Add Device.
Step 2 After you add a device based on the site requirements or click Auto Discover
Device, the details about the device connected to the smart module are displayed.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 155
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-6 Adding a device

----End

5.3.3 Creating a Smart Module Plan View

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose Home > Plan View, create a smart module in Smart Module View and
set the layout and device quantity based on the actual smart module scenario.

Figure 5-7 Creating a view

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 156
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-8 Setting the layout

Table 5-5 Basic configuration parameters

Paramete Drop- Description
r Down List

Layout Narrow The aisle is located at the rear door of the cabinet.
aisle 1

Narrow The aisle is located at the front door of the cabinet.

aisle 2

Single-row Aisles are located at both the front and rear doors of
dual-aisle the cabinet.
(recomme
nded)

No layout No need to lay out the smart module view.

Half-size cabinet Each cabinet has two configuration positions. Number

qty./row of half-size cabinets in each row = Number of
cabinets x 2

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 157
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Paramete Drop- Description

r Down List

Used Common This option is suitable for most application scenarios.

Environme temperatu
nt re
(default)

High The cabinet is used in high-temperature scenarios.

temperatu
re

Low The cabinet is used in low-temperature scenarios.

temperatu
re

Step 3 Drag the icons of registered devices and devices on the cabinet list to appropriate
positions in the layout to create a smart module plan view.

Figure 5-9 Setting the smart module plan view layout

----End

5.3.4 Commissioning Sensors

5.3.4.1 Setting and Adding a Smoke Detector

If a smoke detector is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

Context
If the detector is prefabricated, only check its settings.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 158
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Procedure
Step 1 Set smoke detector parameters.
1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
2. Choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify. The Batch Signal
Configuration page is displayed.
3. Set Device type to ECC800 and Device name to ECC800, and click OK.
4. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_1 to Smoke
and click Submit.
5. Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters > AI/DI_1
Port Settings.
6. Set Smoke sensor to Enable and click Submit.
7. Set Smoke sensor type to Smoke sensor, click Submit.
Step 2 Check the monitoring functions of smoke detector.

Table 5-6 Function check

Check Method Normal Connection Status Alarm Clearance Method

Simulate a Smoke DI alarm is displayed Disconnect the smoke

smoky on the active alarm page of detector cable and then
environment the app or WebUI. reconnect it to clear the
under the smoke alarm.
detector.

----End

5.3.4.2 Commissioning a T/H Sensor

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RS485_IN port
on the T/H sensor, and the other end has been connected to the COM1 port on
the ECC800-Pro.

Procedure
Step 1 Set a device address for the T/H sensor.
Operate the DIP switch on the T/H sensor to set the device address for the sensor.
Toggle switches 1 to 6 specify the device address in binary mode. ON indicates 1,
and OFF indicates 0.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 159
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-10 DIP switch definitions for T/H sensors

NOTE

The numbers 1 and 2 indicate the DIP switch settings of the T/H sensors.

Table 5-7 Setting a device address

Address Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle

Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 Switch 6

1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

3 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

4 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

Step 2 Add a T/H sensor.

1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
2. Add a T/H sensor.

Table 5-8 Adding a T/H sensor

Path Parameter Value

Choose Device Select Sensor from the drop-down list.

System Attribute
Settings >
Device Device Type Select T/H sensor from the drop-down list.
Management Connect To Select ECC800 from the drop-down list.
and click Add
Device. Communica Select COM1 from the drop-down list.
tions Port

Device In this example, device address is set to 1.

address During actual configuration, set the device
address for the T/H sensor based on the
actual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the T/H sensor connects to the ECC800-
Pro properly.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 160
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

– If the connection is normal, click Confirm. The device connection

information is displayed in the Number of connected devices list.
– If the connection is abnormal, check whether the device is properly
connected to the ECC800-Pro, whether the device and the ECC800-Pro are
running properly, and whether the parameter settings are consistent with
the device parameters.

Step 3 Check the function of the T/H sensor.

Table 5-9 Function check

Check Method Normal Connection Status

Check the running Choose Monitoring > Aisle > T/H Sensor Group
information about the T/H > T/H Sensor n > Running Information, and
sensor on the WebUI. view the current cabinet temperature and
humidity.

Set T/H sensor alarm Choose Monitoring > Aisle > T/H Sensor Group
thresholds. > T/H Sensor n > Running Parameters and set
High Temperature Alarm Threshold, Low
Temperature Alarm Threshold, High Humidity
Alarm Threshold, and Low Humidity Alarm
Threshold as required.
NOTE
The default values of High Temperature Alarm
Threshold, Low Temperature Alarm Threshold, High
Humidity Alarm Threshold, and Low Humidity
Alarm Threshold are 30.0°C, 5.0°C, 85.0% RH, and
15.0% RH respectively.

----End

5.3.4.3 Commissioning an Electrode Water Sensor

Prerequisites
One end of the network cable has been stripped, core wires 7 and 8 have been
connected to the cable delivered with the electrode water sensor, and the other
end of the network cable has been connected to the AI/DI port on the rack
environment unit.

Context
● To use the AI/DI sensor, enable the corresponding AI/DI port and name the
sensor. The specific alarm then can be reported.
● If the sensor is preinstalled, only check its settings.
● The actual value may vary. Only the method of the parameter settings is
described.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 161
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Procedure
Step 1 Set water sensor parameters.
NOTE

The following describes how to connect a water sensor to the AI/DI_3 port on the ECC800-
Pro.
1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
2. Choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify. The Batch Signal
Configuration page is displayed.
3. Set Device type to ECC800 and Device name to ECC800, and click OK.
4. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_3 to Leak
and click Submit.
5. Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters > AI/DI_3
Port Settings.
6. Set Leak sensor to Enable and click Submit.
7. Set Leak sensor type to Leak sensor(Electroc) and click Submit.
8. Click Unhide All Advanced Signals, and click Power Supply Parameters.
Ensure that II power supply enable(AIDI_3/COM2/AIDI_5) is Yes.
Step 2 Check the function of the water sensor.

Table 5-10 Function check

Check Method Normal Connection Status Alarm Clearance Method

Immerse the two Leak DI alarm is generated Wipe dry the two contacts of
contacts of the on the active alarm screen of the water sensor. The alarm
electrode water the app or on the WebUI. disappears automatically.
sensor in water.

----End

5.3.5 Commissioning a Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock

This section applies to 02116411 and 0211642 cabinets.

Prerequisites
The cabinet door can be opened and closed properly. If the cabinet door cannot be
opened and closed properly, adjust the position of the cabinet electronic clasp lock
by performing steps 1 and 2.

Procedure
Step 1 (Optional) Check whether the cabinet door lock is leveled to 2000 (+3) mm. If
not, adjust it.
Step 2 (Optional) If the cabinet door still cannot be opened after step 1 is performed,
adjust the position of the cabinet electronic clasp lock by using the slotted holes
until the cabinet door can be opened and closed properly.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 162
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Step 3 Set device addresses for cabinet electronic clasp locks.

● A cabinet electronic clasp lock is installed at the front and rear doors of the
cabinet respectively. The address for the cabinet electronic clasp lock on the
front door is an odd number, and that for the cabinet electronic clasp lock on
the rear door is an even number.
● Set a device address for a cabinet electronic clasp lock by operating the toggle
switch on the cabinet electronic clasp lock. Toggle switches 1 to 6 specify the
device address in binary mode. ON indicates 1, and OFF indicates 0.

Figure 5-11 Toggle switch addresses of the cabinet electronic clasp locks

NOTICE

The number indicates the DIP switch setting of the electronic clasp lock.

Table 5-11 Setting device addresses

Address Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle
Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 Switch 6

1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

Step 4 Add the cabinet electronic clasp locks.

1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
2. Create a cabinet view in Smart Module View on the home page.
3. Add a cabinet electronic clasp lock.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 163
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Table 5-12 Adding a cabinet electronic clasp lock

Path Parameter Setting

Choose System Settings Device Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock

> Device Management Attribute
and click Add Device.
Device Type Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock

Connect To ECC800

Communicat COM3
ions Port

Device Enter the actual device address of

Address the cabinet electronic clasp lock.

4. Click Test Connect to check whether the connection between the cabinet
electronic clasp lock and the ECC800-Pro is normal.
– If the connection is normal, click Confirm. The connected devices are
displayed in the Number of connected devices list.
– If the connection is abnormal, check whether the device is properly
connected to the ECC800-Pro, whether the device and the ECC800-Pro are
running properly, and whether the parameter settings are consistent with
the device parameters.
5. Repeat Step 4.3 and Step 4.4 to connect other cabinet electronic clasp locks.
Step 5 Commission the cabinet electronic clasp locks.

Table 5-13 Function check

Function Path Operation

View Choose Click the View the running information

cabinet Monitoring > Running Info about cabinet electronic clasp
electroni Cabinet > tab. lock 1 on the WebUI.
c clasp Global
lock cabinet >
informati Cabinet
on Electronic
Clasp Lockn.
Change Click the Change the cabinet electronic
the Running clasp lock name.
cabinet Parameters tab.
electroni
c clasp
lock
name.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 164
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Function Path Operation

Remotely Click the Select Open the door on

open a Controls tab. Controls, and click Submit to
cabinet remotely open the door.
electroni
c clasp
lock

Open Choose Monitoring > Cabinet Select Open front door or Open
cabinet and click the Controls tab. back door from the Open the
electroni door drop-down list box, select
c clasp the setting, and click Submit.
locks in The cabinet electronic clasp locks
batches unlock the doors in batches
based on the signal value.

a: Cabinet electronic clasp lock 1 is used as an example.

Step 6 When closing the door, rotate the lock handle vertically downward. If the door
cannot be opened or closed properly, locate the fault.
1. Check whether there is friction between the lock tongue and the cabinet
electronic clasp lock. If so, adjust the installation position of the clasp lock.

Figure 5-12 Adjusting the position of a clasp lock

2. Check whether there is interference between the lock tongue and the cabinet
column. If so, adjust the installation position of the lock tongue.

Figure 5-13 Adjusting the position of a lock tongue

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 165
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

3. Check whether there is interference between the castors and the door sill at
the bottom of the cabinet. If so, remove the fasteners that secure the castors.

Figure 5-14 Removing the fastener

NOTICE

If the door still cannot be opened or closed properly, check the following items:
● Whether cables are connected correctly
● Whether the DIP switch setting is correct

----End

5.3.6 Commissioning a Cabinet Door Status Sensor

This section applies to 02116410 cabinets.

Context
The door status sensor is installed before delivery. You only need to check the
settings.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the cabinet door status sensor parameters.
1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
2. Choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify. The Batch Signal
Configuration page is displayed.
3. Set Device type to ECC800 and Device name to ECC800, and click OK.
4. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_2 to Door1
and click Submit.
5. Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters > AI/DI_2
Port Settings.
6. Set Door1 sensor to Enable and click Submit.
7. Set Door1 sensor type to Door sensor and click Submit.
Step 2 Check the door status sensor functions.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 166
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Table 5-14 Function check

Check Method Normal Connection Status

Open the cabinet door. Door1 DI alarm is generated on the active

alarm page of the app or WebUI.

----End

5.3.7 Commissioning an Intelligent rPDU

If an intelligent rPDU is required, perform the following steps to configure it.

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the COM port on
the rPDU and the other end has been connected to the COM port on the ETH
converter.

Procedure
Step 1 Add an rPDU.
1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
2. Add an rPDU.

Table 5-15 Adding an rPDU

Path Parameter Value

Choose Device Select PDU from the drop-down list box.

System attribute
Settings >
Device Device Type Select rPDU-MPDU, rPDU-PN, or rPDU
Management from the drop-down list box based on the
and click Add actual device.
Device. The Connect To ECC800-Pro
parameters
for adding Communicati COM1/COM2
devices are ons Port
displayed.
Device Enter the actual device address of the
Address rPDU.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the rPDU connects to the ECC800-Pro
properly.
– If the connection is normal, click Confirm. The connected devices are
displayed in the Number of connected devices list.
– If the connection is abnormal, check whether the cable is properly
connected to the device, whether the device is running properly, and

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 167
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

whether the parameter settings are consistent with the device

parameters.

----End

5.3.8 Configuring Event Notification

You can set alarm notification by email or SMS as required. Information about a
maximum of 20 users who will receive alarm notifications can be displayed.

Prerequisites
To implement alarm notification by SMS, the following conditions must be met:
● The ECC800-Pro is configured with a 4G module and supports standard SIM
card access.
● The ECC800-Pro is connected to a network with an email server through a
WAN port. Both the Internet and local area network (LAN) are supported.
NOTE

To use the WeChat notification function, connect the ECC800-Pro to the iManager-M
system. For details, see the user guide of the iManager-M system.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Event Notification.
Step 2 Set the outbox parameters.
1. Set related parameters in the Outbox Settings area on the Mailbox Settings
page. If the address type of the outbox is Domain name, choose System
Settings > System Parameters, and set related parameters in the DNS
Server Address area on the Monitor IP page.
NOTE

The DNS server address is provided by the local network operator.

2. Click Test to check the email sending function. If an email fails to be sent,
check the outbox settings and DNS Server Address. If the email is sent
successfully, click Submit.

NOTICE

If Test email sending failed is displayed, check whether the receiver's mailbox
server requires CA certificate verification. If it is required, download the CA
certificate from the receiver's mailbox website and upload it in the Mailbox
Certificate area.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 168
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-15 Mailbox setting page

NOTE

The following mailbox addresses are for reference only (the actual parameters apply) and are
used only for configuring the email function.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 169
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Table 5-16 Main parameters on the outbox configuration page

Mailbox Mailbox Mailbox Server Encryption Remarks
Type Server IP Address Mode and
Domain SMTP Port
Name

Sina Mail smtp.sina.co How to obtain: Non- ● The mailbox

m 1. Click Start encryption: 25 server must
on the PC, comply with
163 Mail smtp.163.co Non- the standard
m enter cmd in encryption: 25;
the Running SMTP
SSL encryption: protocol to
area, and 465
press Enter ensure that
126 Mail smtp.126.co to access the Non- the email
m administrato encryption: 25; sending and
r window. SSL encryption: receiving
465 functions
2. Enter ping are normal.
email server
QQ Mail smtp.QQ.co SSL encryption: ● Enter the
domain
m 465 mailbox
name at the
position of client
Sohu Mail smtp.sohu.c Non-
the blinking authorizatio
om encryption: 25
cursor and n password
139 Mail smtp.139.co press Enter Non- at Password
m to obtain encryption: 25 for 163 Mail,
email server 126 Mail,
Hotmail smtp- TLS encryption: and QQ
IP addresses.
mail.outloo 587 Mail.
k.com ● If the
189 Mail smtp.189.co Non- mailbox type
m encryption: 25 is not in the
list, set
parameters
by referring
to the help
information
of the
mailbox
type.

Step 3 Add a mailbox address to receive emails.

NOTE

The email address is used only for configuring the email function and is not used for other
purposes. The address is encrypted during transmission in the ECC800-Pro to ensure that
the personal data of users is fully protected.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 170
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-16 Adding a mailbox address to receive emails

NOTE

Click Test to check whether the added mailbox is available. If it is available, Successfully to
send the test email. is displayed. If it is unavailable, Failed to send the test email. is displayed.
Check whether the receiver's mailbox parameters for receiving emails are correctly set.

Step 4 Add a mobile phone number to receive event notifications.

NOTE

The mobile phone number is used only for configuring the SMS function and is not used for
other purposes. The phone number is encrypted during transmission in the ECC800-Pro to
ensure that the personal data of users is fully protected.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 171
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-17 Adding a mobile phone number

NOTE

Click Test to check whether the added mobile phone number is available. If it is available,
Successfully to send the test short message. is displayed. If it is unavailable, Failed to send
the test short message. is displayed. Check whether the mobile phone number is correctly set.

Step 5 Set the alarm notification delay time and add alarm notification parameters.

Figure 5-18 Setting the alarm notification parameters

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 172
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-19 Adding alarm notification

NOTICE

Mailbox Address in Alarm Notification can be selected after it is added in

Mailbox Settings. Mobile Phone Number can be selected after it is added in
SMS Settings.

Step 6 Click Confirm to access the re-authentication page. Enter Login password and
click Submit.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
To modify or delete the configured mailbox address or mobile phone number, click
Modify or Delete.
If the email address fails to be set, rectify the fault based on the handling
suggestions of the error codes listed in the following table. If an error code is not
listed in the following table, provide the ECC run log and contact the customer
technical support.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 173
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Table 5-17 Mailbox error codes

Type Error Code Suggestion

Failed to 2 1. Check whether the address of the DNS

resolve the server is correctly configured.
domain 2. Check whether the domain name of the
name. email server is correctly configured.
3. Check whether the network communication
between the monitoring module and the
DNS server is normal.

3 1. Try again later.

2. Check whether the domain name of the
email server is correctly configured.

5 Check whether the IP address corresponding to

the domain name of the email server is
configured.

11 1. Check whether the address of the DNS

server is correctly configured.
2. Check whether the domain name of the
email server is correctly configured.

Failed to 22 1. Try again later. This issue occurs when the

connect to domain name is just configured and the
the email domain name resolution is not complete.
server. 2. Check whether the address of the DNS
server is correctly configured.
3. Check whether the domain name of the
email server is correctly configured.

100 Check whether the local network cable is

properly connected and whether the network
adapter is activated. Ensure that the local
network connection is normal.

101 Check the firewall and router configurations

between the ECC and the email server to
ensure that the ECC communicates with the
email server properly.

110 1. Verify that the communication link between

the ECC and the email server is normal.
2. Check whether the service port of the email
server is enabled.

111 Check whether the email server is running

properly and whether the service port is
started properly.

112 Check whether the email server is running

properly.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 174
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Type Error Code Suggestion

113 Check the firewall and router configurations

between the ECC and the email server to
ensure that the ECC communicates with the
email server properly.

Failed to 1 1. Import the CA certificate that matches the

establish a email server certificate.
secure 2. Check the validity period of the certificate
connection. and replace it with a valid CA certificate.
3. Provide monitoring run logs and contact the
service center.

Failed to send 504 Check whether the outbox address matches

the test email. the user name for logging in to the email
server.

535 1. Log in to the email box of the email sender

and start the SMTP service.
2. Check whether the user name and password
for logging in to the email server are
correct.
3. Log in to the email box of the email sender
and start the third-party client license code
function.

553 Check whether the outbox address matches

the user name for logging in to the email
server.

530 On the outbox configuration page, set

Encryption mode to SSL.

554 1. Log in to the email server or contact the

personnel of the third-party email server to
modify the spam setting rule.
2. Provide ECC run logs and contact the service
center.

550 1. Log in to the email server or contact the

third-party email server personnel to add
the IP address to the whitelist.
2. Provide ECC run logs and contact the service
center.

421 Reduce the email sending speed or contact the

third-party email server personnel to increase
the email server configuration limit.

450 Contact the personnel of the third-party mail

server to add the sender address to the
whitelist and do not limit the sending rate.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 175
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Type Error Code Suggestion

451 Provide ECC run logs and contact the service

center to reduce the email sending frequency.

534 Log in to the sender's mailbox client and

enable the access to the insecure applications.

5.3.9 Linkage Control

Prerequisites
● You have obtained the IP address of the ECC800-Pro as well as the user name
and password for WebUI login.
● You have prepared a PC with an IP address in the same network segment as
that of the ECC800-Pro, and the PC is connected to the WAN_1 port on the
ECC800-Pro.
● Ensure that Enable linkage control function is Yes.

Linkage Grouping

Table 5-18 Linkage grouping

Linkage Defa Function
Category ult
Statu
s

Link Off When this linkage status is set to on:

emergency ● If the smart cooling product communicates
ventilation properly but does not provide the cooling function,
with clasp lock and the temperature in the cold aisle is greater
open than or equal to the preset value (30°C by default),
the rear door of the cabinet automatically opens.
● If all smart cooling products fail to communicate,
and the temperature in the cold aisle is greater
than or equal to the preset value (30°C by default),
the rear door of the cabinet automatically opens.
● If the rear door of the cabinet is open and the
temperature in the cold aisle is higher than the
preset value (35°C by default), the front door of
the cabinet automatically opens.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 176
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Linkage Defa Function

Category ult
Statu
s

Link smoke Off When this linkage status is set to on:

alarm with ● If a smoke alarm is generated, the rear cabinet
clasp lock open door is opened.
● If the cabinet door is opened, the ECC800-Pro
generates a door open alarm. After the smoke
alarm is cleared, you need to manually close the
door. After the door is closed, the door open alarm
is cleared.
● If the emergency heat dissipation control logic
conflicts with the smoke alarm control logic, the
smoke alarm control logic takes precedence.
NOTE
If the fire extinguishing system is installed inside the
smart module, the linkage function is not enabled.

Link fire Off When this linkage status is set to on:

control with ● If a fire alarm (dry contact alarm) is generated, the
clasp lock open rear door of the cabinet is opened.
● If the cabinet door is opened, the ECC800-Pro
generates a door open alarm. After the fire alarm
is cleared, you need to manually close the cabinet
door. After the door is closed, the door open alarm
is cleared.
● If the emergency heat dissipation control logic
conflicts with the fire control logic, the fire control
logic takes precedence.
NOTE
If the fire extinguishing system is installed inside the
smart module, the linkage function is not enabled.

5.3.9.1 Linking the Smoke Alarm with Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock Open

Context
In this example, the smoke sensor connects to port AI/DI_1. The actual port may
vary.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.

Step 2 Choose System Settings > Linkage Control.

Step 3 Ensure that Enable linkage control function is Yes.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 177
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Step 4 On the Linkage Group tab page, set Link smoke alarm with clasp lock open to
on.
NOTE

Select Link smoke alarm with clasp lock open under Linkage Group. If its value is on, the
corresponding logic configurations under Linkage Logic List are available. If its value is off, the
corresponding logic configurations under Linkage Logic List are unavailable.

Step 5 Modify the AI/DI_1 signal name.

1. Choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify. The Batch Signal
Configuration page is displayed.
2. Set Device type to ECC800 and Device name to ECC800, and click OK.
3. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_1 to Smoke
and click Submit.
Step 6 Enable the AI/DI device.
1. Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters > AI/DI_1
Port Settings.
2. Set Smoke sensor to Enable and click Submit.
3. Confirm that Smoke sensor type is automatically identified as Smoke sensor
or Smoke sensor(NC).
4. Click Unhide All Advanced Signals, and click Power Supply Parameters.
Ensure that III power supply enable(AIDI_1/DO) is Enable.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After the smoke alarm is cleared, you need to manually close the door. After the
door is closed, the door open alarm is cleared.

5.3.9.2 Linking the Fire Control with Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock Open

Context
In this example, the fire extinguishing system connects to port AI/DI_2. The actual
port may vary.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose System Settings > Linkage Control.
Step 3 Ensure that Enable linkage control function is Yes.
Step 4 On the Linkage Group tab page, set Link fire control with clasp lock open to
on.
NOTE

Select Link fire control with clasp lock open under Linkage Group. If its value is on, the
corresponding logic configurations under Linkage Logic List are available. If its value is off, the
corresponding logic configurations under Linkage Logic List are unavailable.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 178
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Step 5 Modify the AI/DI_2 signal name.

1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
2. Choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify. The Batch Signal
Configuration page is displayed.
3. Set Device type to ECC800 and Device name to ECC800, and click OK.
4. In the query result area, set the new signal name of AI/DI_2 to Fire
extinguishing device and click Submit.

Step 6 Enable the AI/DI device.

1. Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters > AI/DI_2
Port Settings.
2. Set Fire sensor to Enable. Click Submit to access the AI/DI_2 setting page.
3. Select Fire sensor type and set it to Normal Open or Normal Close as
required.
4. Click Unhide All Advanced Signals, then click Power Supply Parameters.
Ensure that I power supply enable(AIDI_2/COM1/AIDI_4/COM3) is Enable.
5. Click Submit.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After the fire alarm is cleared, you need to manually close the cabinet door. After
the door is closed, the door open alarm is cleared.

5.3.9.3 Linking the Emergency Ventilation with Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock
Open

Context
In this example, the smart cooling product connects to port COM3. The actual port
may vary.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.

Step 2 Choose System Settings > Linkage Control.

Step 3 Ensure that Enable linkage control function is Yes.

Step 4 On the Linkage Group tab page, set Link emergency ventilation with clasp lock
open to on.
NOTE

Select Link emergency ventilation with clasp lock open under Linkage Group. If its value is
on, the corresponding logic configurations under Linkage Logic List are available. If its value is
off, the corresponding logic configurations under Linkage Logic List are unavailable.

----End

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 179
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Follow-up Procedure
After the alarm is cleared, you need to manually close the door. After the door is
closed, the door open alarm is cleared.

5.3.10 Commissioning a Camera (LAN Switch Networking

Scenario)

NOTICE

This section applies to the C3220-10-SIU camera whose software version is

SDC 10.0.0.SPC200.

5.3.10.1 Commissioning a C3220 Camera

Prerequisites
● If multiple cameras are connected, retain the connection of one camera and
disconnect other cameras. After commissioning the connected camera,
commission other cameras in the same way.
● The camera IP address must be unique and set to the actual value.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the camera WebUI.
1. Configure the PC IP address and the camera IP address in the same network
segment. Enter the camera IP address (192.168.0.120 by default) in the
address bar of Microsoft Edge and press Enter.
a. When you open Microsoft Edge for the first time, choose Settings >
Default browser, set Allow sites to be reloaded in Internet Explorer
mode (IE mode) to Allow, restart the browser, go to the Appearance
page, and click Internet Explorer mode (IE mode) button. After the
setting is complete, open Microsoft Edge again, enter the IP address in
the address bar, and click the IE mode button in the upper right corner of
the page to log in. To use the IE mode, click the IE mode button on the
toolbar.

Figure 5-20 IE mode button

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 180
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

2. Set the password as prompted upon the first login. Then use the new
password to log in.
NOTE

– To prevent security risks, the system prompts you to set the password of the admin
user when you log in to the system for the first time.
– If you enter incorrect passwords for five consecutive times, the account will be
locked for 5 minutes by default.
– To prevent security risks, periodically log in to the system as the admin user, click
the drop-down list in the upper right corner, and click Change Password to change
the administrator password.

Step 2 Commission cameras and set parameters for them. For details, see the delivered
documents.
1. Preview the site situation in real time and check the camera coverage through
videos. Adjust the lens if necessary.
2. Choose Configuration > Network > Basic Settings. On the TCP/IP tab page,
set the IP address.

Figure 5-21 Setting the IP address

Table 5-19 IP address parameters

Parameter Description

IPv4 address Method for obtaining the IP address. The options are
assignment Obtain IP address automatically and Use the
following IP address. The default value is Obtain IP
address automatically.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 181
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Parameter Description

IPv4 address Camera IP address. This parameter is available only

when IPv4 address assignment is set to Use the
following IP address.
Enter the planned IP address, for example,
192.168.1.161. IP addresses starting with 127 are
invalid. You must enter an IP address starting with a
value that ranges from 1 to 223.

IPv4 gateway Gateway IP address of the network where the camera is

located. The default value is 192.168.0.1.

IPv4 subnet Subnet mask of the network where the camera is

mask located. The default value is 255.255.255.0.

Primary DNS Primary DNS IP address. The default value is 0.0.0.0.

Secondary DNS Secondary DNS IP address. The default value is 0.0.0.0.

3. Set the camera stream type and primary stream parameters. Path:
Configuration > Video/Audio > Video. See the following figures.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 182
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-22 Setting primary stream parameters

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 183
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-23 Setting secondary stream 1 parameters

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 184
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Table 5-20 Video stream parameters

Parameter Description

Primary stream/ Set the stream type based on the site requirements.
Secondary – Primary stream: The primary streams feature high
stream bit rate, definition, and bandwidth consumption.
They are applicable to local storage.
– Secondary stream: The secondary streams provide
smooth video, occupy small bandwidth, and are
applicable to data transmission over low-bandwidth
networks.
NOTE
SD card recording supports only primary streams.

Intelligent After intelligent encoding is enabled, a camera can

encoding automatically adapt to scenarios to reduce the bit rate
and save the storage space.
A higher intelligent encoding level indicates more
significant reduction of the bit rate, which however may
lead to image quality deterioration.

Slice This parameter is available only when you set Encoding

protocol to H.264.
Multi-slice encoding indicates that video streams are
divided into multiple segments. Each segment forms a
slice. The encoding process of each slice is independent
of each other. Therefore, the camera can encode and
decode multiple slices in parallel, improving encoding
and decoding performance. This parameter is selected
by default.

Encoding Set the coding protocol based on the site requirements.

protocol The options are as follows:
– H.264: The H.264 protocol requires relatively small
bandwidth to ensure video quality.
– MJPEG: The MJPEG protocol decodes and displays
each frame independently without referring to the
previous and next frames. This protocol has a small
compression ratio and requires large bandwidth to
ensure video quality. This protocol is suitable for
video editing.
– H.265: The H.265 protocol is bandwidth-conserving
compared with the H.264 protocol.

Encoding The options of H.264 profiles include Base profile, Main

complexity profile, and High profile. Among these profiles, the
baseline profile has the lowest encoding compression
performance and lowest requirements on hardware
decoding performance, while the high profile has the
highest.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 185
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Parameter Description

Resolution A higher resolution indicates clearer images and higher

bandwidth consumption.

Bit rate type This parameter is available only when you set Encoding
protocol to H.264 or H.265.
The bit rate is measured by data bits transmitted in a
unit of time.
– Variable bit rate: The bit rate varies depending on
the image complexity to ensure the clarity of images
with great dynamic changes. The bit rate is low if the
image is simple or static. The variable bit rate is
recommended.
– Constant bit rate: The constant bit rate remains the
same. The upper limit of the instantaneous bit rate is
set to 110%. If the bit rate is incorrectly configured
for images with great dynamic changes, the images
will be unclear.

Max. bit rate This parameter is available only when you set Bit rate
type to Variable bit rate.
The bit rate range depends on the selected resolution.

Bit rate value Average bit rate when Bit rate type is set to Constant
bit rate.
The bit rate range depends on the selected resolution.

Bit rate control This parameter is available only when you set Bit rate
mode type to Constant bit rate. The options are as follows:
– Frame rate priority: Ensure the smoothness of the
video image.
– Image quality priority: Ensure the quality of the
video image.

Frame rate The frame rate is measured by the number of frames

displayed in a second.
A higher frame rate indicates clearer and smoother
images and higher bandwidth consumption.

Image quality This parameter is available only when you set Encoding
protocol to H.264 or H.265 and Bit rate type to
Variable bit rate.
Better image quality requires higher bandwidth.
Therefore, select proper image quality based on the site
requirements.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 186
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Parameter Description

I-frame interval This parameter is available only when you set Encoding
protocol to H.264 or H.265.
An I frame is an intra-coded frame that represents a
fixed image independent of other picture types. Each
group of pictures (GOP) begins with this type of frame.
A smaller I-frame interval indicates better video quality
and higher bandwidth consumption.

Layered This parameter is available only when you set Encoding

encoding protocol to H.264 or H.265.
To enable layered encoding, select Layered encoding.

JPEG quality This parameter is available only when you set Encoding
protocol to MJPEG.
A larger value indicates higher image quality.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Commission other cameras by referring to this section.

NOTICE

If you log in to the camera using a browser but cannot play videos, upgrade the
camera to the latest version and install the browser plugin as prompted. After the
installation is complete, log in to the camera using the browser again.

5.3.10.2 Commissioning a C3220 Camera (SD Card Configured)

Context
● If the VCN or IVS1800 is not configured and an SD card is chosen, perform the
following procedure.
● The camera IP address must be unique and set to the actual value.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the Huawei camera WebUI.
1. Configure the PC IP address and the camera IP address in the same network
segment. Enter the camera IP address (192.168.0.120 by default) in the
address bar of the browser and press Enter.
2. Set the password as prompted upon the first login. Then use the new
password to log in.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 187
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Step 2 For details about how to commission the camera and set parameters, see the
documents delivered with the device or the documents obtained by referring to
the "Preparing Documentation" section.
1. Preview the site situation in real time and check the camera coverage through
videos. Adjust the lens if necessary.
2. Choose Configuration > Network > Basic Settings. On the TCP/IP tab page,
set the IP address.

Figure 5-24 Setting the IP address of the camera

3. Format the SD card.

a. Choose Configuration > Storage > Storage Management.
b. The Storage Management page is displayed. Format the SD card.
4. Set the camera stream type and primary stream parameters. Path:
Configuration > Video/Audio > Video.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 188
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-25 Setting video and audio stream parameters

NOTE

If longer-time video storage is required, set camera parameters according to the following
table.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 189
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Table 5-21 Camera configuration parameters

Condition Result

Encoding Resolutio Frame I-Frame Minimum Supporte

Protocol n Rate Interval Bit Rate d Video
Required Storage
Duration
(h)

H.265 1080P 25 50 1 Mbit/s 66

H.264 1080P 25 50 1 Mbit/s 66

H.265 720P 25 50 0.8 Mbit/s 75

H.264 720P 25 50 1 Mbit/s 66

H.265 720P 25 50 0.6 Mbit/s 105

H.264 720P 25 50 0.8 Mbit/s 75

5. Import the motion detection algorithm package. Search for the algorithm
package SDC-D16_10.0.0.SPC200_C3220-10-SIU.ZIP on the technical support
website, download the package, and decompress it. Return to the WebUI and
choose Configuration > System > System Maintenance. On the Upgrade
tab page, select the algorithm package SDC-C16_10.0.0.SPC200_beh.zip and
upload it.
6. Choose Configuration > Detection > Motion. Select Enable, click Add, add
motion detection areas, set motion detection parameters, and click Save.

Figure 5-26 Motion detection

7. Configure the device alert deployment and alarm linkage policy. Choose
Configuration > Service > Alarm Service, click Common Alarm, and
configure Device Alert Deployment and Alarm Linkage Policy.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 190
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-27 Device alert deployment

Figure 5-28 Configuring the alarm linkage policy

----End

5.3.11 (Optional) Commissioning the IVS1800

5.3.11.1 Setting Parameters on the IVS1800 WebUI

Context
A default IP address has been configured for the IVS1800 before delivery. Modify
the IP address based on the actual network plan.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 191
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

NOTICE

● The parameter setting method varies according to the IVS1800 software

version.
● This section uses IVS 10.0.0.SPC200 as an example to describe how to set
parameters. For details, see the IVS1800 product documentation of the
corresponding software version.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the network connection between the PC for logging in to the OMU
portal and the IVS1800 is normal.
If the device is just delivered or has just been restored to factory settings, ensure
that the PC for logging in to the OMU portal is directly connected to the IVS1800
and is in the same network segment as the IVS1800.
For the device that is just delivered or has just been restored to factory settings, its
network information is as follows:
● IP address: 192.168.3.111
● Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
● Gateway address: 192.168.3.1
Step 2 Enter https://IP address:8443 in the address box, and press Enter.
In the URL, IP address indicates the IP address of the IVS1800.
Step 3 Log in to the OMU portal. Set the service system and operating system passwords
at the first login.
1. Set the password for user admin of the service system.
2. Set the password for user admin of the operating system.
3. Set the password for user root of the operating system.
4. Use the configured service system password to log in to the OMU portal
again.
Step 4 Configure disk initialization.
NOTE

Recording data can be stored only after you install and initialize the disks.
1. Choose Storage > Disks and click Forcibly Format.
2. Configure disk initialization.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 192
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-29 Disk initialization (RAID 5 economical configuration by default)

NOTICE

– If one or two hard disks are configured, select NON-RAID.

– If three or more hard disks are configured, confirm with the product
manager whether to configure the RAID function.

▪ To configure the RAID function, select RAID High Reliability and then
RAID5 Economical.

▪ If the RAID function is not configured, select NON-RAID.

Table 5-22 RAID mode description

Parameter Name Description

RAID High Reliability – RAID5 Recommended

Four or more hard disks are required,
and one hard disk is used as the hot
spare disk.
– RAID5 Economical
Three or more hard disks are
required, and one hard disk is used as
the hot spare disk.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 193
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Parameter Name Description

NON-RAID – Each recording file is stored on only

one hard disk. The disk usage is high,
but the data storage reliability is
lower than that in RAID 5 mode.
– When the number of hard disks is
greater than or equal to 7, the
system automatically uses the three
hard disks with the smallest slot
numbers to form a RAID 1 group, in
which one hard disk functions as the
hot spare disk. Every four of the
remaining hard disks form a RAID 10
group. If the number of remaining
hard disks is less than 4, the disks do
not form a RAID 10 group.

Step 5 Modify the IP address for the IVS1800.

1. Choose System > Network Configuration. Set the service IP address, time
zone, and time according to the site requirements.

Figure 5-30 Network adapter settings (single address by default)

NOTE

Examples are provided. The actual parameters prevail.

– Smart ETH gateway networking scenario: Set the Service IP Address to
192.168.248.50, Subnet Mask to 255.255.255.0, and Gateway IP Address to
192.168.248.10.
– LAN switch networking scenario: Set the Service IP Address to 10.43.163.76,
Subnet Mask to 255.255.255.0, and Gateway IP Address to 10.43.163.1.
2. Change the PC IP address to an address in the network segment of the new
IVS1800 IP address, enter the IVS1800 IP address in the address box of the
Internet browser, and log in to the OMU portal system.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 194
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Step 6 Configure NAT on the IVS1800.

1. Configure the PUBLIC module.
a. Choose System > Advanced Configuration, set Module to PUBLIC, and
click Search.
b. Click Edit in the record where the value of Parameter Name is NNatIP,
set the IP address, and click Save.

Figure 5-31 Setting the IP address for NNatIP

c. Click Edit in the row where the value of Parameter Name is

IMGUNNatPort, and set the NAT port number of the IMGU. Ensure that
the setting is the same as the NAT mapped port number configured on
the firewall. Click Save.
d. Click Edit in the row where the value of Parameter Name is
NatRtspServerPort, and set the NAT port number of the MU. Ensure that
the setting is the same as the NAT mapped port number configured on
the firewall. Click Save.
e. Click Edit in the row where the value of Parameter Name is
NatRtspTlsServerPort, and set the NAT port number of the MU. Ensure
that the setting is the same as the NAT mapped port number configured
on the firewall. Click Save.

Figure 5-32 Setting the port number

2. Set other parameters based on the site requirements by referring to the

preceding steps.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 195
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Table 5-23 Parameter description

Module Parameter Name Setting
Name

PUBLIC NNatIP Northbound IP address of the

IVS1800, which must be the same as
the NAT-mapped IP address
configured on the firewall.

IMGUNNatPort NAT port number of the IVS1800

IMGU, which must be the same as
the NAT-mapped port number
configured on the firewall.
The port number of the IMGU
before mapping is set to 9554.

NatRtspServerPort NAT port number of the IVS1800

MU, which must be the same as the
NAT mapped port number
configured on the firewall.
The port number of the MU before
mapping is set to 554.

NatRtspTlsServerPort TLS NAT port number of the

IVS1800 MU, which must be the
same as the NAT mapped port
number configured on the firewall.
The TLS port number of the MU
before mapping is set to 322.

Step 7 (Optional) Configure the IVS1800 to synchronize time with the NTP server. Choose
System > Time Configuration and configure the server time.

Table 5-24 Parameter description

Parameter Setting

The NTP clock source server Indicates whether the NTP clock
source server is specified for time
synchronization.
● Select Yes if an NTP server is
configured onsite.
● Select No If no NTP server is
configured onsite.

NTP server IP Indicates the IP address of the NTP

clock source server. After this
parameter is specified, the server
synchronizes the time to this clock
source.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 196
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

● If an NTP server is configured onsite, synchronize the time with the NTP
server.
● If no NTP server is configured onsite, manually configure the server time:
Change Timezone config and Time config based on the time of the source
server to be synchronized.
Step 8 Configure cameras to synchronize time with the IVS1800.
The camera NTP synchronization function for the server is disabled by default. The
camera NTP synchronization function needs to be enabled for the server that
connects to the camera. After the camera NTP synchronization function is enabled
on the server, cameras will automatically synchronize time with the server.
1. Log in to the OMU portal as user admin.
2. Choose System > Advanced Configuration.
3. Set Module Name to SCU and click Search.
4. In the search results, click Edit in the row where Parameter Name is NTPIPC
and set Value to 1.
5. Click Save. After the camera NTP synchronization function is enabled, the
camera, after being connected to the server, will automatically time-
synchronize with the server.

Figure 5-33 Configuring camera NTP synchronization

Step 9 Create a user.

When connecting to the IVS1800 on the NetEco, you need to log in as a non-
admin user.
1. Log in to the OMU portal as user admin.
2. Choose Users > Manage User > Add User.
NOTE

When creating a user, you can select Enable account validity period and set Valid from
and Valid to to set the account validity period for the created user.
3. Set Multi-point logins to a value greater than 2.
4. On the User List page, click Permission Settings next to the new user, select
the cameras to be browsed and queried, set other parameters, and click Save.
----End

5.3.11.2 Setting Parameters on the iClient S100

Prerequisites
● The network communication between the IVS1800 and the camera is normal.
● The network communication between the PC where the iClient S100 is
installed and the device is normal.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 197
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

NOTICE

● The parameter setting method varies according to the software version of the
iClient S100.
● This section uses iClient S100 V3.1.0 as an example to describe how to set
parameters. For details, see the iClient S100 user manual of the corresponding
software version.
● In a non-standard networking scenario (the IVS1800 is connected to a LAN
switch and the camera is connected to the ECC800-Pro), if the video preview
and recording playback functions cannot be performed on the iClient S100,
upgrade the ECC800-Pro to V500R023C00SPC200 or a later version.

Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the client installation package from the HOLOWITS.
1. Access the HOLOWITS (https://www.holowits.com/soft-download), and enter
iClient in the search box.
2. Find iClient S100 in the search result and download the installation package
of a version later than V3.1.x.
NOTE

– Download the latest version of iClient S100, and install and commission it by
referring to the iClient S100 user manual of the corresponding version.
– Use your mobile number to register a Huawei Cloud account, complete real-name
authentication, and then log in to the HOLOWITS.
– Before installing the iClient S100, you are advised to disable the antivirus software
installed on your computer or preinstalled on the Windows operating system, to
prevent environment check failures. You can ignore any antivirus software
exception detected during the environment check.
– The check takes a few seconds.

Step 2 Right-click the client installation program and choose Run as administrator from
the shortcut menu. Select a language during the installation and click OK.
Step 3 Select an installation mode (for example, server+client) and click Next.
Two installation modes are available: server+client and client. Choose the
installation mode based on site requirements. For details, see the following table.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 198
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Table 5-25 Installation modes

Installation Scenario and Restriction

Mode

Server+Client ● An iClient S100 system requires at least one iClient S100

server.
● When only one client is required for service configuration and
operations, you only need to complete the installation in this
mode.
● In this mode, if you log in to the local iClient S100 server,
enter 127.0.0.1 as the server IP address. If you log in to other
iClient S100 servers, enter the IP address of the peer PC as
the server IP address.

Client ● When configuring services and performing operations on

multiple clients, select the client mode on other computers in
addition to the server+client mode on the local computer.
● Currently, one iClient S100 server can connect to a maximum
of 16 clients (including the one installed on the computer in
server+client mode).
● In this mode, enter the IP address of the iClient S100 server
after logging in, that is, the IP address of the PC where the
existing server is installed.

Step 4 Select I accept this agreement (A) and click Next.

Step 5 Set parameters such as the server port and click Next.
NOTE

● The default values of Web Port and Adms Port are 8098 and 8088 respectively.
If the ports are occupied, manually change the port number. Use a port number that is
not in use and that is not the database port number 5442 or Redis port number 6390,
21, or 80.
● Select Add exception to the firewall to prevent the Windows firewall from blocking
the program.

Step 6 Select the installation directory and click Next.

NOTE

The default installation path is C:\Program Files\iClient S100. You can also click Browse to
specify the installation path. Ensure that the selected installation path has sufficient disk
space as prompted.

Step 7 Select the path for saving the backup files and click Next.
NOTE

By default, the system scans all disks, locates the disk with the largest available space, and
creates the SecurityDBBack folder. You can also click Browse to specify the path for storing
the backup files.

Step 8 Click Install to start the installation.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 199
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Step 9 A message is displayed at the end of installation, asking whether to restart the
computer immediately (the default option is Yes). If Yes is selected, after you click
Finish, the computer automatically restarts to complete the installation.
NOTE

After the software is installed, it takes about 2 minutes to start services. Wait until all
services are started and then perform operations.

Step 10 Connect to the iClient S100.

Step 11 Start the client.
● On Windows 7, double-click the iClient S100 icon. The login page is
displayed.
● On Windows 10, right-click the iClient S100 icon, choose Properties >
Compatibility, select Run as an administrator, and click OK. Then double-
click the iClient S100 icon. The login page is displayed.
Step 12 Log in to the iClient S100.

Figure 5-34 Logging in to the client

Table 5-26 Parameter description

Parameter Description

Chinese/ Select a display language for the iClient S100.

English

User Enter the user name and password of the administrator or a new
Name/ user.
Password NOTE
● You need to set the password upon the first login.

● Click to clear the password. Hold the mouse button down on

to view the current password.

Remember If you select this option, the password of the user used for the last
password login is saved.

Forgot If you have bound your account to an email address, you can
password retrieve your password using your email address.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 200
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Parameter Description

Port Port number

NOTE
The default values of Web Port and Adms Port are 8098 and 8088
respectively.
If the ports are occupied, manually change the port number. Use a port
number that is not in use and that is not the database port number 5442
or Redis port number 6390, 21, or 80.

S100 ● Server+client installation:

Server IP – If a local server is used, the server IP address is the local IP
address 127.0.0.1.
– If you want to log in to another server, enter the IP address
of the PC where the server is located.
● Client installation:
Enter the IP address of the PC where the server to be
connected is located.
CAUTION
Ensure that the PC where the iClient S100 server is installed is started
and the network is normal. Otherwise, service operations on the client
that logs in to the server may fail.

Step 13 On the iClient S100 home page, choose Maintenance Management > Video
Device > Device List.
Step 14 Click Add in the upper right corner and select IP Access or Search Access. For
details about how to set the parameters for adding a device on the IP Access
page, see the following table.

Table 5-27 Adding a device

Parameter/Button Description

Device Type Specifies the type of the device to add (IVS1800).

Name Specifies the device name.

Address Specifies the device address. The format is

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, for example, 192.168.1.10.

Port Specifies the device port. The default port number is

18531.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 201
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Parameter/Button Description

User Name ● You are advised to create a customized user account

and use it to connect to the iClient S100.
Password After configuration, the user can directly access the
iClient S100. The iClient S100 allows the user to
change the password upon the first login.
If the user password is changed on the OMU portal,
right-click the device on the iClient S100, choose
Login from the shortcut menu, enter the new
password, and log in to the iClient S100 again.
● If the default user admin (with a custom password)
logs in to the IVS1800 for the first time, the page for
changing the password is displayed. You are advised
not to use this user to log in to the iClient S100.

Step 15 Add cameras.

1. On the iClient S100 home page, choose Maintenance Management > Video
Device > Device List > Main Devices.
2. Right-click an IVS1800 device and choose Add Camera. The Device Access
tab page is displayed.
3. Select Auto Batch Access (Recommended) and click Start.
4. Search for cameras by IP address segment.
a. Select the driver supported by the device, that is, the protocol for
connecting cameras (HWSDK or ONVIF, with HWSDK recommended).
b. Click Add Network Segment and enter the start and end IP addresses of
cameras.
NOTE

▪ It is recommended that you specify a proper network segment to shorten the

search time.

▪ If a network segment is set, the system searches this network segment for
cameras in unicast mode. You can set multiple network segments so that you
can search for cameras on multiple VLANs.

▪ If you do not set a network segment, the system searches for cameras in
broadcast mode. In this case, the system can only search for cameras located
on the same network segment as the IP address of the local server. You are
advised to search for cameras by network segment or add cameras in
batches.
c. Click Next to search for cameras.
d. (Optional) Click Stop to stop the search.

Table 5-28 Parameter description

Parameter Setting

Drive Select HWSDK.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 202
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Parameter Setting

IP address Enter the start and end IP addresses of the camera. You are
segment advised to set the IP address segment accurately to minimize
the search time.
– The system supports multiple IP address segments
(including different VLANs).
– If you do not set the IP address segment, only cameras
whose IP addresses are in the same subnet as the IP
address of the local server can be found in the system.

Port – Port number of the camera to be added. If HWSDK is used

to add cameras, the default port number is 6061. If ONVIF
is used to add cameras, the default port number is 80.
– If all cameras to be connected have the same port number,
you can set the port number for one camera and click
Apply to Others.

Account – Registration user name and password used to connect the

and camera to the IVS1800.
Password – If all cameras to be added share the same registration user
name and password, you can use the batch verification
function.

5. You can use IP Address and Vendor to filter the required cameras in the
camera search result and select the required cameras. Alternatively, you can
directly select the required cameras in the camera list. Then verify accounts.
NOTE

The user name and password are the ones used for registering the camera with the
HWSDK protocol.
6. Select the cameras to be connected and click Next. The camera connection
result is displayed.
7. Click Finish.
Step 16 Set the camera type.

Table 5-29 Configuration description

Scenario Where to Configure Configuration

Adding cameras through Camera web system Set connection

ONVIF parameters.

Adding cameras to a Maintenance Add cameras to a group

group Management > Video to facilitate camera
Device > Group Device management.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 203
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Scenario Where to Configure Configuration

Adjusting an area Maintenance Select one or multiple

Management > Video cameras and click
Device > Device List
to
adjust the area to which
the cameras belong on
the Main Device or
Camera tab page.

----End

5.3.11.3 How Do I Troubleshoot the Failure to Find a Camera on the iClient

S100?

Context
Users can access and manage the IVS1800 and cameras on the iCient S100. When
I am adding a camera through Search Access, the system stays at the Searching
for cameras page for more than 1 minute and cannot discover the camera.

Figure 5-35 Selecting a mode to add cameras

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 204
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-36 Searching for cameras

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 205
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Troubleshooting Process

Figure 5-37 Troubleshooting flowchart

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the network between the iClient and the IVS1800 is bidirectionally
connected.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 206
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

1. Run the following command on the PC where the iClient is installed to check
the communication from the iClient to the IVS1800:
ping IVS1800 server IP address

– If the communication fails, the network of the iClient may be faulty.

Check the physical network connectivity between the PC where the
iClient is installed and the ECC800-Pro.
– If the communication is normal, go to Step 1.2.
2. On the IVS1800, choose Maintenance > Network Connection Test to test
the communication from the IVS1800 to the iClient.

Figure 5-38 Testing network connectivity

– If the test fails, go to Step 2.

– If the test succeeds, go to Step 4.
Step 2 On the IVS1800, choose System > Network Configuration to check whether the
value of Gateway IP Address is 192.168.248.10.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 207
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

● If not, change the Gateway IP Address to 192.168.248.10.

● If yes, go to Step 3.

Step 3 Check whether the PC where the iClient is installed is deployed after the intranet
or the firewall.

Figure 5-39 Network link of the iClient

● If yes, contact network engineers to modify the network configuration to

ensure that the IVS1800 can access the iClient. Alternatively, connect another
PC in the same network segment as the IVS1800 to the WAN port of the
ECC800-Pro for logging in to the iClient.
● If no, go to Step 4.

Step 4 Re-subscribe to the IVS or cameras.

● If at least one camera has been added, you can cancel subscription and then
re-subscribe to it.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 208
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-40 Canceling subscription

● If no camera has been added, you can delete the current IVS1800 and add it
again.

Figure 5-41 Deleting the IVS1800

Step 5 If the fault persists, restart the iClient or the PC where the iClient is installed.
NOTE

Since the iClient process will reside in the system for a long time, closing the iClient may
also fail to completely close the process, so you are advised to close the cuServer.exe
process through the Task Manager.
If the PC where the iClient is installed has multiple network adapters, you are advised to
disable irrelevant network adapters and then search for cameras.

Step 6 If the fault persists after the restart, you are advised to add a camera through IP
Access.
NOTE

You can view the camera IP address on the ECC800-Pro.

If an old camera is to be connected, set the Device Login Port to 6060.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 209
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-42 IP access

Figure 5-43 Viewing the camera IP address

Figure 5-44 Device login port

----End

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 210
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

5.3.12 (Optional) NetEco Management

5.3.12.1 Connecting a Communications Cable

Networking Through the WAN1 Port

Step 1 Connect the communications cable to the WAN1 port on the ECC800-Pro.

Figure 5-45 Connecting a communications cable

----End

Networking Through the WAN1 and WAN2 Ports

Step 1 Connect the communications cable to the WAN1 and WAN2 ports on the ECC800-
Pro.

Figure 5-46 Connecting communications cables

NOTE

When the same NetEco is accessed through the WAN1 and WAN2 ports, the WAN1 and
WAN2 ports back up each other.
For example, when the WAN1 is disconnected from the NetEco, the ECC800-Pro establishes
a link with the NetEco through the WAN2.
● In this scenario, select WAN_1/WAN_2 when configuring the network port for link
setup.
● In this scenario, the MAC addresses of the WAN1 and WAN2 ports are the same by
default. You need to configure a static route for the WAN2 by referring to the method of
configuring dual MAC addresses and static routes.

----End

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 211
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

4G Networking
4G communication can be used to access the NetEco management system that
has a public IP address.

Step 1 Loosen the screws on both sides of the panel of the ECC800-Pro main control
module.

Step 2 Pull the handles on both sides of the panel of the ECC800-Pro main control
module, and remove the module.

Figure 5-47 Removing the ECC800-Pro main control module

Step 3 Install the SIM card.

NOTE

The monthly traffic of the SIM card is not less than the total traffic of all networked
devices. It is recommended that the monthly traffic of the SIM card be greater than or
equal to the total number of networked devices multiplied by 20 MB.

Step 4 Insert the ECC800-Pro main control module into the slot.

Step 5 Tighten the screws on both sides of the panel of the ECC800-Pro main control
module.

Step 6 Install a 4G antenna.

Figure 5-48 Installing a 4G antenna

----End

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 212
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

5.3.12.2 Setting NetEco Parameters

Procedure
Step 1 Apply for a fixed IP address to the equipment room network administrator.
Step 2 Set ECC800-Pro communications parameters.
● (WAN1 port networking) On the ECC800-Pro WebUI, set the IP address,
subnet mask, and default gateway, and click Submit.

Table 5-30 IP parameters

Path Paramete Default Setting
r Value

System IP 192.168.8. Set this parameter based on the IP

Settings > 10 address assigned by the network
System administrator.
Paramete
rs > Subnet 255.255.25 Set this parameter based on the
Monitor mask 5.0 subnet mask assigned by the
IP > network administrator.
WAN_1 Default 192.168.8. Set this parameter based on the
gateway 1 default gateway address assigned by
the network administrator.

● (4G networking) Set mobile data parameters on the ECC800-Pro WebUI.

Table 5-31 Mobile data

Path Paramete Default Setting
r Value

Choose Mobile Disable Set this parameter to Enable and

System data click Submit.
Settings > control
System
Paramete
rs >
Mobile
Data.

Step 3 Click Submit.

Step 4 Set NetEco communications parameters and authentication password on the
ECC800-Pro WebUI.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 213
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Table 5-32 NetEco parameters

Path Parameter Default Setting

Value

System Server IP 192.168.8. IP address of the primary NetEco

Settings > 11 server
NMS NOTE
Application The NetEco IP address and the ECC800-
> NetEco > Pro IP address must be configured in
Communicat the same network to ensure normal
connection between the NetEco and
ion
the ECC800-Pro.
Parameters
Port number 31220 31220

Table 5-33 Setting an authentication password

Path Parameter Default Setting

Value

System Authenticatio Modifyme Set this parameter based on

Settings > n password _123 customer requirements.
NMS NOTE
Application Requirements for setting passwords:
> NetEco > 'a~z','A~Z','0~9','~!@#^*_={}:,./?-`
Set $'(8-32 characters that include at least
three of the following types: lowercase
Authenticati
letters, uppercase letters, digits, and
on Password special characters)

Confirm - -
authenticatio
n password

Step 5 Click Submit.

----End

5.3.12.3 Obtaining the NetEco Software License

The NetEco software license is not provided together with software to the
customer. Therefore, obtain the NetEco software license in advance.

Obtain the license from the Huawei's enterprise support website.

● For enterprise users:
a. Log in to Huawei's enterprise support website https://
support.huawei.com/enterprise.
b. Browse or search for iMaster NetEco License Application Guide, and
apply for the license of the NetEco software by referring to the guide.
● For carriers:

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 214
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

a. Log in to Huawei's carrier support website https://support.huawei.com.

b. Browse or search for iMaster NetEco License Application Guide, and
apply for the license of the NetEco software by referring to the guide.

5.3.12.4 Obtaining the Adapter Software Installation Packages

Obtaining the Adapter Software Installation Packages

This section describes how to obtain the adapter software installation package.
● For enterprise users:
a. Log in to the iMaster NetEco Huawei enterprise technical support
website.
b. Obtain the iMaster NetEco V600R021C10SPCXXX ReleaseDoc_EN
(Data Center).zip, DP_V600R021C10SPCXXX_XXAdapters.zip, and
DP_V600R021C10SPCXXX_DomainAdapters.zip packages, decompress
the packages, and search for the adapter software installation package in
the DP_V600R021C10SPCXXX_XXAdapters based on the NE types and
versions in the iMaster NetEco V600R021C10XXX Version Mapping (Data
Center).
● For carriers:
a. Log in to the iMaster NetEco Huawei technical support website.
b. Obtain the iMaster NetEco V600R021C10SPCXXX ReleaseDoc_EN
(Data Center).zip, DP_V600R021C10SPCXXX_XXAdapters.zip, and
DP_V600R021C10SPCXXX_DomainAdapters.zip packages, decompress
the packages, and search for the adapter software installation package in
the DP_V600R021C10SPCXXX_XXAdapters based on the NE types and
versions in the iMaster NetEco V600R021C10XXX Version Mapping (Data
Center).
On the Software tab page, download the NetEco software and digital signature
files.

Verifying Software Packages

To prevent software packages from being maliciously tampered with during
transmission or storage, you need to download the corresponding signature file
during the software package download for integrity verification.
After the software package is downloaded, verify its PGP digital signature
according to the OpenPGP Signature Verification Guide. If the software package
fails to pass the verification, do not use the software package and contact Huawei
technical support.
Before a software package is used in installation, its digital signature also needs to
be verified according to the OpenPGP Signature Verification Guide to ensure that
the software package is not tampered with.
● For carrier users, visit https://support.huawei.com/carrier/
digitalSignatureAction.
● For enterprise users, visit https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/tool/
pgp-verify-TL1000000054.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 215
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

5.3.12.5 Powering On a Server

This topic describes how to power on a server.

Procedure
Step 1 Check that the power cables and ground cables of the upstream components of
the server are securely connected with correct polarity and in good contact.

Step 2 Ensure that the upstream input power supply is not connected. Use a multimeter
to measure the resistance between the upstream output power supplies and
between the working ground and the protective ground. Ensure that the resistance
is 0 for a short circuit and 1 for an open circuit. It is required that short circuits not
occur between power outputs or between the working ground and protective
ground.

Step 3 Turn on the switch for the upstream power supply of the server.

Step 4 Press the power button on the chassis of the server to power on the server.
NOTE

After the server is started properly, the button/indicator of its power switch is displayed
green.

Figure 5-49 Power button on the 2288X V5 server

Figure 5-50 TaiShan 200 server power button

----End

5.3.12.6 Logging In to the NetEco Client

This section describes how to log in to the NetEco client using a web browser.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 216
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Prerequisites
● The network connection between your PC and the client IP address of the
NetEco is normal and the function of the O&M plane are running properly.
● You have obtained the user name and password for login.

Procedure
Step 1 In the browser address box, enter https://IP address of the NetEco server:31943,
and then press Enter.
NOTE

● 192.168.8.11 is the default IP address of the NetEco.

● Latest Chrome (Stable Channel) and Firefox (ESR Release) are recommended.
● You are advised to set the display resolution as 1920 x 1080 or higher.
● Make sure that the IP address of the NetEco server is not contained in the compatibility view
website.

Step 2 Enter the User Name, Password, and click Login.

NOTE

● The preset user of NetEco is admin, the preset password is Changeme_123. This user
has all the operation rights on the managed objects. After the first login, change the
password in time to ensure account security and prevent unauthorized network attacks,
such as data tampering. The relevant party will be liable for any security issues caused
by your failure to change the preset password in time or password loss after changing.
● If the number of online users reaches the maximum number supported by the system, a
message is displayed, indicating that you cannot log in. In this case, contact the system
administrator.
● After you enter the incorrect password for three consecutive times, you must enter the
verification code upon the fourth login. After you enter the incorrect password for five
consecutive times, the user account or the IP address is locked for 10 minutes.

----End

5.3.12.7 Loading the NetEco Software License

The NetEco license file is used to control the functions and management
capabilities of the NetEco. Before using NetEco, you need to load a commercial
license.

Prerequisites
● You have obtained a license.
● You have logged in to the NetEco client using a web browser.

Procedure
Step 1 Click Import License file when you log in to the NetEco at the first time.

Step 2 Click next to the License text box and select a license file.
Step 3 Click Upload.
The information about the imported license file is displayed.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 217
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

5.3.12.8 Installing NE Adapters

Install the NE adapters on the NetEco.

Prerequisites
You have obtained the adapter software installation packages.

Procedure
1. Choose Device Management > Configuration > Device Integration.
2. In the navigation tree on the left, choose Adapter Management and click
Upload.
3. On the page that is displayed, click + to select the file to be uploaded.
4. Click Upload to upload the files.
5. Select the NE adapter packages to be installed on the Adapter Management
page, and click Install. Then, click Yes in the displayed dialog box.
The time required for the installation is related to the number of adapters.
Wait for the installation to complete.

5.3.12.9 Adding a Management Domain

5.3.12.9.1 General Operation: Adding a Management Domain

This section describes how to create a management domain.

Prerequisites
The management domain adapter has been preconfigured or installed.

Context
● The management domains include Park, Building, Room, ContainerDC,
Subnet, NetecoSite, FusionModule500, Modular, Room-ShapeNode, and
Building-ShapeNode. You are advised to plan the subordinate relationship
between management domains and devices before performing operations.
● The NetEco is preconfigured with management domains such as cabinets,
battery cabinets, buildings, containers, floors, FusionModule500, smart
modules, NetEco sites, parks, PDUs, equipment rooms, and subnets. To use
more management domains, you need to install the corresponding adapter
software package on the NetEco.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.
Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning
Configuration.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 218
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Step 3 Choose the upper-layer node of the management domain to be added in the
navigation tree on the left.

Step 4 In the Domain area on the lower left of the page, drag a management domain
icon to the required position in the planning configuration area.
NOTE

You can adjust the shape of Room, Room–ShapeNode, Building–ShapeNode, Floor–

ShapeNode, Container–ShapeNode, and NetecoSite by:
1. Hold down Shift and click the frame to add a yellow dot.
2. Click and move the yellow dot to design an irregular polygon.

3. To delete a management domain, click the domain icon and select Delete under .

Step 5 In the right side of the view area, set Management Info.
NOTE

You can configure Management Info, Electricity Info, and Refrigeration Info for the
equipment room management domain.

Step 6 Click on the toolbar to save the settings.

Step 7 Repeat steps Step 3 to Step 6 until the configuration is complete.

----End

5.3.12.9.2 Example: Adding a Smart Module

This section describes how to create a module in the root node, subnet, equipment
room, container, or site management domain.

Prerequisites
You have created management domains in Planning Configuration.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.

Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning
Configuration.

Step 3 Choose the management domain where you want to add a smart module from
the navigation tree on the left.

Step 4 In the Domain area on the lower left of the page, select Modular from the drop-
down list box.

Step 5 Select the Modular to be added and drag the modular icon to the management
domain area.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 219
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-51 Adding the smart module in the room area

Step 6 Modify Management Info of the smart module as required or retain the default
values.

Step 7 Click on the toolbar to save the settings.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Perform the following operations on the Planning Configuration page as
required.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 220
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Related Procedure
Operatio
ns

Delete You can delete one module or multiple modules in batches on the
modules current page.
NOTE
If a module contains subdevices, you cannot delete it. You can delete the
module only after you delete subdevices in the module.
● Delete one module.
1. Right-click Modular and click Delete under .
2. In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click Yes.
● Delete multiple modules in batches.

1. Click on the toolbar. The Batch Delete dialog box is

displayed.

Figure 5-52 Deleting multiple modules in batches

2. In the filter box, set filter criteria to filter required modules.

3. Select the smart module to be deleted and click Delete.
4. In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

Add tools 1. Select the module for which you want to add a pillar.
2. In the lower-left corner of the current page, click Tool.
3. Select the Pillar component to be added and drag it to the
planning configuration area.
NOTE
After the component is added, you can set attributes for the component
in the Component Info list in the right pane. The system automatically
displays values for Parent Name and Control Type, and you do not need
to manually set them, you only need to set Name.

4. In the upper area of the current page, click .

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 221
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

5.3.12.10 Creating an ECC800-Pro on the NetEco

Prerequisites
● You have logged in to the NetEco client using a web browser.
● You have created a smart module in Planning Configuration.

Context
For detailed operations, see iMaster NetEco Device Installation and Commissioning
Guide (Data Center) of the corresponding version.

Procedure
1. On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration >
Planning Configuration. The Planning Configuration page is displayed.
2. On the Planning Configuration page, click Discover in the upper left corner.
3. Click Access to access the Device Integration page. You can add an ECC800-
Pro device to the specified smart module on the page.

Figure 5-53 Adding an ECC800-Pro device to the smart module

NOTE

Click OK, and you can view the task information, including Type, Device Name,
Management Domain, Progress, Status, Start Time, End Time, and Detailed
Information in the displayed window.

5.3.13 (Optional) Third-party NMS Management (over SNMP)

5.3.13.1 Connecting a Communications Cable

Procedure
Step 1 Connect a communications cable to the WAN1 port on the ECC800-Pro.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 222
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-54 Connecting a communications cable

----End

5.3.13.2 Setting SNMP Management Parameters

Prerequisites
Before setting SNMP parameters, obtain the information listed as follows from the
NMS.

Table 5-34 Information obtained from the NMS

Item Default Description
Value

SNMP version SNMPv3 SNMP version and port number used by the
ECC800-Pro and NMS. The SNMP versions
SNMP port number 161 include SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3.

● Read community - If you use SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c, enter the

name read and write community names that comply
● Write with the NMS. Otherwise, the ECC800-Pro will
community not connect to the NMS. The read community
name name must be different from the write
community name.

● User name - To enhance the security, you need a user

● MD5/SHA name and password for authentication if you
password use SNMPv3. After the authentication
succeeds, the ECC800-Pro can communicate
● DES/AES with the NMS.
password

Trap target address - IP address of the NMS server.

Trap port 162 Port defined by the user.

Context
● SNMPv3 parameters should be set before connecting the ECC800-Pro to the
NMS. These parameters are required for setting up the ECC800-Pro on the
NMS.
● SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c are insecure. Therefore, SNMPv3 is recommended.
This section uses SNMPv3 as an example.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 223
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Procedure
Step 1 Apply to the equipment room network administrator for a fixed IP address.
Step 2 Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway on the ECC800-Pro WebUI.

Table 5-35 IP parameters

Path Parameter Default Setting

Value

System IP 192.168.8.1 Set this parameter based on the IP

Settings > 0 address assigned by the network
System administrator.
Parameter
s> Subnet 255.255.25 Set this parameter based on the
Monitor IP mask 5.0 subnet mask assigned by the network
> WAN_1 administrator.

Default 192.168.8.1 Set this parameter based on the

gateway default gateway address assigned by
the network administrator.

Step 3 Set SNMP parameters.

1. Choose System Settings > NMS Application > SNMP.
2. Set SNMP Version to SNMPv3 and set SNMP port number to the required
port number or retain its default value 161.
3. Click Submit under SNMP.
4. Click Add under SNMPv3.
5. Set User name, set Authentication protocol to SHA or MD5, set Privacy
protocol to AES or DES, and specify MD5/SHA password, Confirm MD5/SHA
password, DES/AES password, and Confirm DES/AES password.
NOTE

– Set User name, MD5/SHA password, and DES/AES password to any character
strings that meet the system requirements. Note that MD5/SHA password and
DES/AES password must be set to different values. Record the settings.
– MD5 and DES are insecure protocols. Therefore, you are advised to set
Authentication protocol to SHA or set Privacy protocol to AES.
6. Set Password validity period and Advance expiration notification (days).
7. After setting the parameters, click Confirm.
8. Click Add under SNMP Trap.
9. Set Trap target address and Trap port, set SNMP version to SNMPv3, and
specify SNMPv3 user name. Set Trap target address to the IP address of the
NMS server and set Trap port to the port defined by the user.
10. After setting the parameters, click Confirm.
11. Click Export in the Mib File pane, export the MIB file, and send it to the
development engineers of the NMS.

----End

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 224
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

5.3.14 (Optional) iManager-M

For details about iManager-M access configuration, see (Optional) Cloud Service
Access.

5.3.14.1 Connecting a Device (Through the App)

You can use an app to connect a device to the NetEco for management. This
method is recommended because it is more convenient.

5.3.14.1.1 Installing the NetEco App

This section describes the operating environment requirements of the NetEco app
and the method for downloading and installing the NetEco app.

App Running Environment Requirements

● Device: Only Android mobile phones are supported.
● Operating system: Android 8.0 or later. The system cannot be rooted. The
system memory is 1 GB or above/larger.
● The device supports a web browser and can connect to the Internet at a rate
of 500 kbit/s or higher.
● Enough space is available for installing new applications.
● The battery power is sufficient.
NOTE

The device supports display at mainstream resolutions, such as 1920 x 1080 and 2340 x
1080. To ensure the stability of each function, 1920 x 1080 is recommended. It is strongly
recommended that Android mobile phones provided by global mainstream vendors, such as
SAMSUNG and HUAWEI, be used.

Installing the App

NOTE

Currently, the NetEco app can be installed only on Android mobile phones.
● Obtaining the software installation package from the Huawei AppGallery and
installing the app
a. Go to Huawei AppGallery (https://appgallery.huawei.com) and search
for NetEco.
b. Tap Download to obtain the app installation package.
c. Install the app as prompted.
After the installation is complete, the NetEco app icon is displayed on the
desktop of the mobile phone.
● Installing the NetEco app by scanning the QR code

On the NetEco screen, tap in the upper left corner and use your mobile
phone to scan the QR code in the lower right corner.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 225
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-55 NetEco app QR code

5.3.14.1.2 (Optional) Replacing the App Certificate on a Mobile Device

This section describes how to replace the preset security certificate in the NetEco
app on a mobile device. Preset Huawei certificates apply only to commissioning
scenarios. For security purposes, apply for certificates from the certification
authority (CA) and use them to replace the preset certificates. Using the same
certificate for a long time increases the probability of being cracked. Replace the
current certificate periodically.

Prerequisites
● The NetEcoapp has been installed.
● You have applied for a new certificate file server.cer from the CA.
NOTE

server indicates the name of the certificate file, which can be renamed.

Procedure
Step 1 Import the obtained digital certificate to the cer directory in the NetEco folder of
the mobile device.

Step 2 On the Login screen, tap in the upper right corner.

Step 3 On the Certificate Management screen, click Replace certificate.
Step 4 On the Replace certificate screen, select the new certificate. On the displayed
screen, tap Yes.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 226
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-56 Replacing a certificate

----End

5.3.14.1.3 Registering a NetEco App Account

After the app is correctly installed on a mobile device, you can register an account
through the app.

Prerequisites
● The device has connected to a WiFi or mobile network.
● The NetEco app has been installed. For details about how to install it, see
5.3.14.1.1 Installing the NetEco App.

Procedure
Step 1 On the mobile device, tap the NetEco app icon.

Step 2 On the login screen, tap REGISTER.

Step 3 On the registration screen, set the user name, email address, password, and
verification code, and tap REGISTER.

Step 4 After an account is successfully registered, use the registered email address and
password to log in to the NetEco app.

----End

5.3.14.1.4 Logging In to the NetEco App

After the app is installed on a mobile device, you can log in to the NetEco server
using the app.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 227
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Prerequisites
● The device has connected to a WiFi or mobile network.
● The NetEco app has been installed. For details about how to install it, see
5.3.14.1.1 Installing the NetEco App.
● You have registered a NetEco app account. For details, see 5.3.14.1.3
Registering a NetEco App Account.

Procedure
Step 1 On the mobile device, tap the NetEco app icon.
Step 2 On the Login screen, enter the registered mobile number, verification code, or
password.
Step 3 Tap Log In.
After logging in to the NetEco app, enable or disable the Push notifications
function as prompted. For details, see 5.3.14.3.1 How Do I Enable or Disable the
Message Push Function.

NOTE

If no data is displayed on the screen or a message indicating a network error is displayed,

check whether the mobile device has properly connected to a WiFi or mobile network. If
the network is normal, check whether you have been forcibly logged out on the NetEco.
If a Huawei phone is used, the push notification function is enabled for the NetEco app by
default.

----End

5.3.14.1.5 Connecting a Device

Connect devices to the NetEco using the NetEco app.

Prerequisites
● You have logged in to the NetEco.
● You have set NetEco communications parameters on the ECC800-Pro.

Procedure

Step 1 On the Home screen of the NetEco app, tap in the upper right corner.
Step 2 On the Device creation screen, enter device information as prompted.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 228
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-57 Adding a device

Table 5-36 Parameter description

Parameter Description

Device name Name of the device.

ESN ESN of the ECC800-Pro controller.

NOTE
Tap to scan the QR code on the
ECC800-Pro controller to obtain the ESN.
If there is no ESN label or QR code on the
device, you can view the ESN on the
WebUI of the ECC800-Pro controller.

Customer name Customer name.

Device address Address of the device.

Step 3 Tap Submit.

----End

5.3.14.2 Logging In to and Logging Out of the NetEco WebUI

This section describes the operating environment requirements of the NetEco
WebUI and provides guidance for users to log in to or log out of the NetEco
WebUI.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 229
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

5.3.14.2.1 Operating Environment Requirements

To ensure that users can browse and perform operations on the NetEco WebUI,
the PC must meet certain requirements.
Table 5-37 lists the requirements for the operating environment.

Table 5-37 Operating environment requirements

Confi Basic Configuration Requirements
gurat
ion
Item

CPU I5-7500 or later

Mem 8 GB
ory

Oper Windows 10 Professional 64-bit

ating
syste
m

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 230
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Confi Basic Configuration Requirements

gurat
ion
Item

Brow You are advised to use the Chrome browser (stable channel edition) or
ser Firefox browser (ESR edition) of the latest version.
● If the user accesses the NetEco server through a proxy server,
configure the proxy server as follows:
For Chrome:

1. Click in the upper right corner of the browser and choose

Settings.
2. On the Settings page, click Advanced, and then click Open proxy
settings under System.
3. In the Internet Properties dialog box, click LAN settings. In the
Proxy server dialog box, select Use a proxy server for your LAN,
set Address and Port, and click OK.
4. Close the Settings tab page.
For Firefox:

1. Click in the upper right corner of the browser and choose

Options.
2. On the Options page, click Advanced, and then click Settings
under Network.
3. In the displayed Connection Settings dialog box, select Manual
proxy configuration, set HTTP proxy and Port, and click OK.
4. Close the Options tab page.
NOTE
To ensure that the proxy server can access the NetEco server, the network
bandwidth must meet the following requirements:
Uplink (from the browser to the NetEco server) data rate: ≥ 100 kbit/s;
downlink (from the NetEco server to the browser) data rate: ≥ 100 Mbit/s.
● To set exceptions for pop-up windows of the browser, perform the
following steps:
For Chrome:

1. Click in the upper right corner of the browser and choose

Settings.
2. On the Settings page, click Privacy and security under
Advanced, and click Pop-ups and redirects under Site settings in
sequence.
3. In the Pop-ups and redirects dialog box, click Add.
4. In the Add a site dialog box, enter https://server IP
address:server port number (https://10.10.10.1:31943 for
example), and click Add.
5. Close the Settings tab page.
For Firefox:

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 231
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Confi Basic Configuration Requirements

gurat
ion
Item

1. Click in the upper right corner of the browser and choose

Options.
2. On the Options page, click Content and Exceptions under Pop-
ups in sequence.
3. In the Allowed Sites dialog box, set Address of website to
https://server IP address:server port number (https://
10.10.10.1:31943 for example), click Allow, and then click Save
Changes.
4. Close the Options tab page.

5.3.14.2.2 Logging In to the NetEco WebUI

You need to use a browser to log in to the NetEco because it uses the browser/
server (B/S) mode.

Prerequisites
You have obtained a valid username and password.

Procedure
Step 1 In the address box of a browser, enter https://NetEco IP address:31943 and press
Enter.
NOTE

● You are advised to use the latest Chrome browser (Stable Channel version) or Firefox
browser (ESR version).
● Optimal resolution: 1920 x 1080
● A certificate error message is displayed in the web browser when you log in to the
NetEco WebUI for the first time. For details, see 5.3.14.3.2 What Do I Do If the
Browser Displays a Certificate Error or Security Risk.

Step 2 Enter the User Name, Password, and click Log In.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 232
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

NOTE

● Use the preset username admin for the first login. For details about how to obtain the
preset password, see section "Default NetEco Web System User Information" in NetEco
Administrator Guide. This account has the highest operation permissions. Change the
password upon the first login to ensure security.
● If the number of online users reaches the maximum number supported by the system, a
message is displayed indicating that you cannot log in. In this case, contact the
administrator.
● If you enter incorrect passwords for three consecutive times, a verification code is
required at the fourth time. If you enter incorrect passwords for five consecutive times,
the account or IP address will be locked for 10 minutes.

----End

5.3.14.2.3 Logging Out of the NetEco WebUI

This section describes how to log out of the NetEco WebUI.

Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco WebUI using a browser. For details, see
5.3.14.2.2 Logging In to the NetEco WebUI.

Procedure

Step 1 Move the pointer to the icon in the upper right corner of the home page and
click Log Out.

Step 2 In the Log Out dialog box, click Yes.

The account is logged out, and the login page is displayed.

----End

5.3.14.3 FAQs About iManager-M

5.3.14.3.1 How Do I Enable or Disable the Message Push Function

You can enable or disable the real-time alarm notification function as required.

Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco app.

Procedure
Step 1 Enable or disable the Push notifications function as required.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 233
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Table 5-38 Setting the Push notifications function

Operation Description Procedure

Enabling If the Push notifications ● Method 1

the Push function is disabled and 1. When the system displays a
notificatio you need to view the message asking you whether to
ns real-time alarm enable the Push notifications
function information pushed by function, tap OK.
the NetEco app on the
mobile phone, perform 2. Follow the onscreen instructions
this operation. to enable the Push notifications
function.
● Method 2
1. On the home screen of the
NetEco app, tap Me.

2. On the Me screen, tap to

access the Setting screen.
3. On the Setting screen, tap Push
notifications.
4. Follow the onscreen instructions
to enable the Push notifications
function.
NOTE
● If a Huawei phone is used, the Push
notifications function is enabled for the
NetEco app by default.
● If a third-party mobile phone is used,
you need to manually enable the Push
notifications function and ensure that
the HMS Core process is not cleared. If
the HMS Core process is cleared,
messages will be delayed or cannot be
received. In this case, you need to
restart the app to receive pushed
messages.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 234
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Operation Description Procedure

Disabling If you do not need to ● Method 1

the Push view the real-time When the system displays a
notificatio alarms pushed by the message asking you whether to
ns NetEco app on a mobile enable the Push notifications
function phone, perform this function, tap Cancel.
operation. ● Method 2
1. On the home screen of the
NetEco app, tap Me.

2. On the Me screen, tap to

access the Setting screen.
3. On the Setting screen, tap Push
notifications.
4. Follow the onscreen instructions
to disable the Push notifications
function.

Table 5-39 Obtaining addresses involved in the Push notifications function online
Address Description

https://oauth-login.cloud.huawei.com Huawei access token address

https://push-api.cloud.huawei.com Push message address

----End

5.3.14.3.2 What Do I Do If the Browser Displays a Certificate Error or Security Risk

Symptom
● When Google Chrome is used to log in to the NetEco, the system displays a
connection error message, as shown in Figure 5-58.
● When Mozilla Firefox is used to log in to the NetEco, the system displays a
connection error message, as shown in Figure 5-59.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 235
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-58 Connection error message (Chrome)

Figure 5-59 Connection error message (Firefox)

Procedure
NOTE

Operations on the browser may vary depending on browser versions but are similar to the
examples in the following steps. You are advised to perform the operations based on actual
situations.
● Google Chrome:
a. Click Advanced.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 236
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

b. Click Proceed to XX.XX.XX.XX (unsafe).

● Add an exception in the Firefox browser.

a. Click I Understand the Risks, as shown in Figure 5-60.

Figure 5-60 Clicking I Understand the Risks

b. In the expanded area, click Add Exception, as shown in Figure 5-61.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 237
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-61 Adding an exception

c. Click Confirm Security Exception, as shown in Figure 5-62.

Figure 5-62 Confirming security exceptions

5.4 Fire Extinguishing System Power-On

Commissioning
Context
After a fire extinguishing module is configured and installed, you can commission
it.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 238
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 5 Power-On Commissioning

Step 2 Choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify. The Batch Signal
Configuration page is displayed.
Step 3 Set Device type to ECC800 and Device name to System-ECC800, and click OK.
Step 4 In the query result area, set the new signal name of AI/DI_2 to Fire extinguishing
module and click Submit.

----End

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 239
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

6 O&M

6.1 Routine Maintenance

6.1.1 Monthly Maintenance

Table 6-1 Monthly preventive maintenance table
Maintenanc Maintenance Operation Expected Result Troubleshootin
e Area Item g

Power Operating status Check the surge ● The surge ● If the surge
supply and of the surge protection module protection module protection
distribution protection module indicator and indicator is steady module
system miniature circuit green. indicator is
breaker (MCB) ● The MCB is red, replace
status. switched on. the surge
protection
module.
● If the MCB is
off, switch it
on.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 240
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Maintenanc Maintenance Operation Expected Result Troubleshootin

e Area Item g

UPS Operating - ● Ambient ● If the

environment temperature: 0– temperature
40°C or humidity
● Humidity: 0%–95% is abnormal,
RH (non- check the
condensing) smart
cooling
product
status.
● If the input
voltage is
abnormal,
check the
power grid
status and
input cable
connection.

Liquid crystal - According to the If an alarm is

display (LCD) status icons on the present, rectify
LCD, all units are the fault by
operating properly. No checking the
fault or alarm device status
information is found and parameters.
in the active and
historical alarm
records.

Lithium Battery - No battery Identify the

battery management management alarm is cause of an
alarm generated. alarm based on
the alarm
information.

Battery - 1. The surface is If an exception

appearance clean and tidy occurs, contact
without stains. technical
2. The battery support.
terminals are
intact.
3. Batteries are free
from damage and
cracks.
4. Batteries are free
from acid leakage.
5. Batteries are not
deformed or
bulged.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 241
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Maintenanc Maintenance Operation Expected Result Troubleshootin

e Area Item g

Battery operating - 1. Battery operating 1. Identify the

temperature temperature: 0°C cause of an
to 45°C (charging); abnormal
–20°C to +45°C battery
(discharging) operating
2. Battery charge and temperature.
discharge 2. If the fault
conditions meet persists,
the requirements contact
specified in the technical
battery support.
specifications.

ECC800-Pro AC input - Input voltage: 200– If the input

240 V AC voltage is
Frequency: 45–55 Hz abnormal, check
the power grid
status and input
cable
connection.

Output voltage - Output voltage: 53.5 If the output

V DC±5% voltage is
abnormal, check
the load power
and cable
connection.

Indicator - The indicator on the Check the

power module is output voltage
steady green. and determine
whether the
power module
is faulty. If the
power module
is faulty, replace
it.

Fan - No abnormal noise is If abnormal

generated. noise is
generated, clean
the fan.

Operating - ● Ambient If the

environment temperature: –20°C temperature or
to +65°C humidity is
● Humidity: 0%–95% abnormal, check
RH (non- the smart
condensing) cooling product
status.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 242
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Maintenanc Maintenance Operation Expected Result Troubleshootin

e Area Item g

Monitoring - The monitoring If the indicator

module indicator module indicator is is off or any
steady green or abnormal
blinking green. condition
occurs, see 6.2.2
Management
System
Troubleshootin
g to rectify the
fault.

Network interface - The green indicator is If the indicator

indicator steady on, and the status is
yellow indicator is abnormal, check
blinking. the network
cable
connection.

Monitor interface - Export smart cooling Clear the alarms

(network product logs, alarms, by referring to
management temperature, 6.3 Alarm
system or WebUI) humidity, as well as References and
the operating status 6.2.2
and time of the water Management
sensor, door status System
sensor, temperature Troubleshootin
sensor, and smoke g, or contact
sensor from the technical
management system. support.
View the historical
alarms generated in
this quarter and select
the most common
five ones.

Cable connection - The cable connection Secure loose

is secure. cables.

- Cables are not Replace

damaged. damaged
cables.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 243
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Maintenanc Maintenance Operation Expected Result Troubleshootin

e Area Item g

Camera Camera On the ECC800- The monitoring page If the

availability Pro WebUI, is properly displayed monitoring
choose System after you click View. page is not
Settings > Video displayed after
Management to you click View,
enter the video check that the
information page. IP address is
Click an address correctly set,
under Link to and check cable
enter the camera connections or
web page. replace the
camera. For
details, see
6.4.4.4
Replacing a
Camera.

Intelligent Battery - No battery Identify the

lithium management management alarm is cause of an
battery alarm generated. alarm based on
monitoring the alarm
system information.

Cleanliness - Wipe the battery Remove dust.

surface using a piece
of white paper and
the paper does not
turn black.

Battery connection - Battery terminals and Locate poor

cables are in good contact points
contact. between battery
terminals and
cables.

Measurement of - The ambient Locate the

the ambient temperature of the cause of an
temperature of the intelligent battery abnormal
intelligent battery monitoring system is temperature.
monitoring system lower than 45°C.

Water Functions of the Place the water A water leakage If a water

sensor and water sensor and detection cable alarm is generated. leakage alarm is
water water detection into the water not generated,
detection cable and check replace the
cable whether a water water detection
leakage alarm is cable.
generated by the
water sensor.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 244
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

6.1.2 Quarterly Maintenance

Table 6-2 Quarterly preventive maintenance table
Maintenance Maintenance Operation Expected Result Troubleshootin
Area Item g

Power supply and Operating status Check the surge ● The surge ● If the surge
distribution of the surge protection protection protection
system protection module module indicator module module
and MCB status. indicator is indicator is
steady green. red, replace
● The MCB is the surge
switched on. protection
module.
● If the MCB is
off, switch it
on.

UPS Operating - ● Ambient ● If the

environment temperature: temperature
0°C to 40°C or humidity
● Humidity: is abnormal,
0%–95% RH check the
(non- smart
condensing) cooling
product
status.
● If the input
voltage is
abnormal,
check the
power grid
status and
input cable
connection.

LCD - According to the If an alarm is

status icons on present, rectify
the LCD, all units the fault by
are operating checking the
properly. No device status
fault or alarm and parameters.
information is
found in the
active and
historical alarm
records.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 245
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Maintenance Maintenance Operation Expected Result Troubleshootin

Area Item g

Cleanliness - Wipe the cabinet Remove the

surface using a dust, especially
white paper and from the air
the paper does filter on the
not turn black. front door, or
replace the air
filter.

Parameter - The Reset the

configuration configuration of parameters.
the output
voltage grade,
frequency,
number of
batteries, and
battery capacity
meets
requirements.

Power cables and - The insulation ● Replace

terminals layer of cables is damaged
(between the UPS intact and cables.
and the power terminals are ● Secure
distribution free from output
subrack) noticeable terminals.
sparks.

Lithium battery Battery - No battery Identify the

management management cause of an
alarm alarm is alarm based on
generated. the alarm
information.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 246
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Maintenance Maintenance Operation Expected Result Troubleshootin

Area Item g

Battery - 1. The surface is If the battery

appearance clean and tidy appearance is
without abnormal,
stains. contact Huawei
2. The battery technical
terminals are support.
intact.
3. Batteries are
free from
damage and
cracks.
4. Batteries are
free from acid
leakage.
5. Batteries are
not deformed
or bulged.

Battery operating - 1. Battery 1. Identify the

temperature operating cause of an
temperature: abnormal
0°C to 45°C battery
(charging); – operating
20°C to +45°C temperature.
(discharging) 2. If the fault
2. Battery persists,
charge and contact
discharge technical
conditions support.
meet the
requirements
specified in
the battery
specifications.

Battery - Check that the Set parameters

management settings of correctly.
parameter settings battery
management
parameters meet
the requirements
in the user
manual.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 247
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Maintenance Maintenance Operation Expected Result Troubleshootin

Area Item g

Battery bolts - The location of Take photos

the signs marked from multiple
on battery angles and
terminal bolts contact Huawei
indicating tight technical
connections does support.
not change.

Cables between - No cable Replace the

batteries deteriorates and faulty cable.
the insulation
layer does not
crack.

Battery voltage - ● Equalized 1. Check

charging whether the
voltage: 53.5 equalized
V DC charging
● Float voltage and
charging float
voltage: 53.4 charging
V DC voltage of a
battery are
normal.
2. If the
charging
voltage of a
battery
exceeds the
specifications
requirement,
perform a
complete
forcible
equalized
charging for
the battery,
and check
again
whether the
voltage is
normal.
3. If the fault
persists,
contact
technical
support.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 248
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Maintenance Maintenance Operation Expected Result Troubleshootin

Area Item g

Shallow discharge - Conduct a 1. Locate the

test shallow cause when
(recommended) discharge test an exception
when the UPS is is identified.
backed up to 2. If the fault
verify that the persists,
batteries can contact
discharge technical
properly. support.

ECC800-Pro AC input - Input voltage: If the input

200–240 V AC voltage is
Frequency: 45– abnormal, check
55 Hz the power grid
status and input
cable
connection.

Output voltage - Output voltage: If the output

53.5 V DC±5% voltage is
abnormal, check
the load power
and cable
connection.

Indicator - The indicator on Check the

the power output voltage
module is steady and determine
green. whether the
power module
is faulty. If the
power module
is faulty, replace
it.

Fan - No abnormal If abnormal

noise is noise is
generated. generated, clean
the fan.

Operating - ● Ambient If the

environment temperature: temperature or
–20°C to humidity is
+65°C abnormal, check
● Humidity: the smart
0%–95% RH cooling product
(non- status.
condensing)

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 249
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Maintenance Maintenance Operation Expected Result Troubleshootin

Area Item g

Monitoring - The monitoring If the indicator

module indicator module indicator is off or any
is steady green abnormal
or blinking condition
green. occurs, see 6.2.2
Management
System
Troubleshootin
g to rectify the
fault.

Network interface - The green If the indicator

indicator indicator is status is
steady on, and abnormal, check
the yellow the network
indicator is cable
blinking. connection.

Monitor interface - Export smart Clear the alarms

(network cooling product by referring to
management logs, alarms, 6.3 Alarm
system or WebUI) temperature, References and
humidity, as well 6.2.2
as the operating Management
status and time System
of the water Troubleshootin
sensor, door g, or contact
status sensor, technical
temperature support.
sensor, and
smoke sensor
from the
management
system. View the
historical alarms
generated in this
quarter and
select the most
common five
ones.

Cable connection - The cable Secure loose

connection is cables.
secure.

- Cables are not Replace

damaged. damaged
cables.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 250
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Maintenance Maintenance Operation Expected Result Troubleshootin

Area Item g

Camera Camera On the ECC800- The monitoring If the

availability Pro WebUI, page is properly monitoring
choose System displayed after page is not
Settings > Video you click View. displayed after
Management to you click View,
enter the video check that the
information page. IP address is
Click an address correctly set,
under Link to and check cable
enter the camera connections or
web page. replace the
camera. For
details, see
6.4.4.4
Replacing a
Camera.

Intelligent lithium Battery - No battery Identify the

battery management management cause of an
monitoring system alarm alarm is alarm based on
generated. the alarm
information.

Cleanliness - Wipe the battery Remove dust.

surface using a
piece of white
paper and the
paper does not
turn black.

Battery - Battery terminals Locate poor

connection and cables are in contact points
good contact. between battery
terminals and
cables.

Measurement of - The ambient Locate the

the ambient temperature of cause of an
temperature of the intelligent abnormal
the intelligent battery temperature.
battery monitoring
monitoring system system is lower
than 45°C.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 251
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Maintenance Maintenance Operation Expected Result Troubleshootin

Area Item g

Water sensor and Functions of the Place the water A water leakage If a water
water detection water sensor and detection cable alarm is leakage alarm is
cable water detection into the water generated. not generated,
cable and check replace the
whether a water water detection
leakage alarm is cable.
generated by the
water sensor.

6.1.3 Yearly Maintenance

Table 6-3 Yearly preventive maintenance table
Maintenance Maintenance Operation Expected Result Troubleshootin
Area Item g

Power supply and Operating status Check the surge ● The surge ● If the surge
distribution of the surge protection protection protection
system protection module module indicator module module
and MCB status. indicator is indicator is
steady green. red, replace
● The MCB is the surge
switched on. protection
module.
● If the MCB is
off, switch it
on.

Dust inside the Check whether The white paper If the white
power distribution there is dust on that you use to paper is dirty,
subrack the power wipe the PDC clean the power
distribution panels is clean. distribution
subrack panel. subrack.

Bolts between Tighten all bolts The bolts are Tighten a bolt if
power cables and regularly using an secured. it is loose.
the busbar adjustable
wrench after
powering off the
device.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 252
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Maintenance Maintenance Operation Expected Result Troubleshootin

Area Item g

Circuit breaker Switch on or off The circuit If the circuit

the circuit breaker is breaker cannot
breaker after switched on and be switched on
powering off the off smoothly for or off smoothly
device. five times. and there is a
spare circuit
breaker, connect
cables to the
spare one.

Cable insulation Measure the The insulation If the cable

performance insulation resistance is insulation does
resistance using greater than or not meet the
an insulation equal to 5 requirement,
tester after megohms. replace the
power-off. power cable.

Insulation Measure the The insulation If the insulation

performance of insulation resistance is performance is
the power resistance using greater than or poor, check and
distribution an insulation equal to 10 maintain the
subrack tester after megohms. components in
power-off. the power
distribution
subrack, such as
internal cables
and circuit
breakers.

Insulation Measure the The insulation If the insulation

resistance of the insulation resistance is performance is
secondary loop resistance using greater than or poor, check and
an insulation equal to 2 maintain the
tester after megohms. signal cable and
power-off. smart ETH
gateway.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 253
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Maintenance Maintenance Operation Expected Result Troubleshootin

Area Item g

UPS Operating - ● Ambient ● If the

environment temperature: temperature
0°C to 40°C or humidity
● Humidity: is abnormal,
0%–95% RH check the
(non- smart
condensing) cooling
product
status.
● If the input
voltage is
abnormal,
check the
power grid
status and
input cable
connection.

LCD - According to the If an alarm is

status icons on present, rectify
the LCD, all units the fault by
are operating checking the
properly. No device status
fault or alarm and parameters.
information is
found in the
active and
historical alarm
records.

Cleanliness - Wipe the cabinet Remove the

surface using a dust, especially
white paper and from the air
the paper does filter on the
not turn black. front door, or
replace the air
filter.

Parameter - The Reset the

configuration configuration of parameters.
the output
voltage grade,
frequency,
number of
batteries, and
battery capacity
meets
requirements.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 254
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Maintenance Maintenance Operation Expected Result Troubleshootin

Area Item g

Power cables and - The insulation ● Replace

terminals layer of cables is damaged
(between the UPS intact and cables.
and the power terminals are ● Secure
distribution free from output
subrack) noticeable terminals.
sparks.

Lithium battery Battery - No battery Identify the

management management cause of an
alarm alarm is alarm based on
generated. the alarm
information.

Battery - 1. The surface is If the battery

appearance clean and tidy appearance is
without abnormal,
stains. contact Huawei
2. The battery technical
terminals are support.
intact.
3. Batteries are
free from
damage and
cracks.
4. Batteries are
free from acid
leakage.
5. Batteries are
not deformed
or bulged.

Battery operating - 1. Battery 1. Identify the

temperature operating cause of an
temperature: abnormal
0°C to 45°C battery
(charging); – operating
20°C to +45°C temperature.
(discharging) 2. If the fault
2. Battery persists,
charge and contact
discharge technical
conditions support.
meet the
requirements
specified in
the battery
specifications.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 255
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Maintenance Maintenance Operation Expected Result Troubleshootin

Area Item g

Battery - Check that the Set parameters

management settings of correctly.
parameter settings battery
management
parameters meet
the requirements
in the user
manual.

Battery bolts - The location of Take photos

the signs marked from multiple
on battery angles and
terminal bolts contact Huawei
indicating tight technical
connections does support.
not change.

Cables between - No cable Replace the

batteries deteriorates and faulty cable.
the insulation
layer does not
crack.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 256
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Maintenance Maintenance Operation Expected Result Troubleshootin

Area Item g

Battery voltage - ● Equalized 1. Check

charging whether the
voltage: 53.5 equalized
V DC charging
● Float voltage and
charging float
voltage: 53.4 charging
V DC voltage of a
battery are
normal.
2. If the
charging
voltage of a
battery
exceeds the
specifications
requirement,
perform a
complete
forcible
equalized
charging for
the battery,
and check
again
whether the
voltage is
normal.
3. If the fault
persists,
contact
technical
support.

Shallow discharge - Conduct a 1. Locate the

test shallow cause when
(recommended) discharge test an exception
when the UPS is is identified.
backed up to 2. If the fault
verify that the persists,
batteries can contact
discharge technical
properly. support.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 257
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Maintenance Maintenance Operation Expected Result Troubleshootin

Area Item g

Capacity test - When the UPS is 1. Locate the

(recommended) backed up, cause when
discharge a an exception
battery to the is identified.
undervoltage 2. If the fault
alarm threshold, persists,
to refresh the contact
capacity of the technical
battery. support.

Battery - 1. When battery 1. Rectify any

connection strings are abnormal
powered off, connection.
check the 2. If the fault
reliability of persists,
each contact
connection technical
point from support.
positive
terminals to
negative
terminals.
Check that all
points are
connected
reliably.
2. Use a torque
wrench to
check the
tightening
torque for
each battery
screw. The
torque meets
the
requirements
of the battery
manufacturer.
After
checking that
the battery
screws meet
the
requirements,
mark the
screws for
later check.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 258
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Maintenance Maintenance Operation Expected Result Troubleshootin

Area Item g

ECC800-Pro AC input - Input voltage: If the input

200–240 V AC voltage is
Frequency: 45– abnormal, check
55 Hz the power grid
status and input
cable
connection.

Output voltage - Output voltage: If the output

53.5 V DC±5% voltage is
abnormal, check
the load power
and cable
connection.

Indicator - The indicator on Check the

the power output voltage
module is steady and determine
green. whether the
power module
is faulty. If the
power module
is faulty, replace
it.

Fan - No abnormal If abnormal

noise is noise is
generated. generated, clean
the fan.

Operating - ● Ambient If the

environment temperature: temperature or
–20°C to humidity is
+65°C abnormal, check
● Humidity: the smart
0%–95% RH cooling product
(non- status.
condensing)

Monitoring - The monitoring If the indicator

module indicator module indicator is off or any
is steady green abnormal
or blinking condition
green. occurs, see 6.2.2
Management
System
Troubleshootin
g to rectify the
fault.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 259
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Maintenance Maintenance Operation Expected Result Troubleshootin

Area Item g

Network interface - The green If the indicator

indicator indicator is status is
steady on, and abnormal, check
the yellow the network
indicator is cable
blinking. connection.

Monitor interface - Export smart Clear the alarms

(network cooling product by referring to
management logs, alarms, 6.3 Alarm
system or WebUI) temperature, References and
humidity, as well 6.2.2
as the operating Management
status and time System
of the water Troubleshootin
sensor, door g, or contact
status sensor, technical
temperature support.
sensor, and
smoke sensor
from the
management
system. View the
historical alarms
generated in this
quarter and
select the most
common five
ones.

Cable connection - The cable Secure loose

connection is cables.
secure.

- Cables are not Replace

damaged. damaged
cables.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 260
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Maintenance Maintenance Operation Expected Result Troubleshootin

Area Item g

Camera Camera On the ECC800- The monitoring If the

availability Pro WebUI, page is properly monitoring
choose System displayed after page is not
Settings > Video you click View. displayed after
Management to you click View,
enter the video check that the
information page. IP address is
Click an address correctly set,
under Link to and check cable
enter the camera connections or
web page. replace the
camera. For
details, see
6.4.4.4
Replacing a
Camera.

Intelligent lithium Battery - No battery Identify the

battery management management cause of an
monitoring system alarm alarm is alarm based on
generated. the alarm
information.

Cleanliness - Wipe the battery Remove dust.

surface using a
piece of white
paper and the
paper does not
turn black.

Battery - Battery terminals Locate poor

connection and cables are in contact points
good contact. between battery
terminals and
cables.

Measurement of - The ambient Locate the

the ambient temperature of cause of an
temperature of the intelligent abnormal
the intelligent battery temperature.
battery monitoring
monitoring system system is lower
than 45°C.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 261
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Maintenance Maintenance Operation Expected Result Troubleshootin

Area Item g

Water sensor and Functions of the Place the water A water leakage If a water
water detection water sensor and detection cable alarm is leakage alarm is
cable water detection into the water generated. not generated,
cable and check replace the
whether a water water detection
leakage alarm is cable.
generated by the
water sensor.

6.2 Troubleshooting

6.2.1 Power Supply and Distribution System Troubleshooting

Except mains outage, power supply and distribution faults are caused by the
damage or failure of one or more components. Rectify the faults based on fault
location and fault type.

NOTICE

● When a UPS is faulty, alarm information is displayed on the LCD. Critical alarms
must be handled before powering on the UPS again. Otherwise, the fault may
be extended, or the UPS may be damaged.
● If the fault persists, contact technical support.

Table 6-4 Power supply and distribution system troubleshooting

Symptom Possible Cause Measure

The power input to the ● The switch trips ● Use a multimeter to

downstream device is abnormally. check whether there
abnormal. ● The UPS is faulty. is a short circuit. Turn
on the switch again,
and check whether
the system is
overloaded.
● Restart the UPS. If the
UPS is faulty, replace
it.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 262
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Symptom Possible Cause Measure

The surge protection ● The SPD circuit ● Check that the SPD
function fails. breaker is OFF. circuit breaker is
● The SPD ground cable turned on. The power
is not connected. distribution subrack
(monitoring type) will
● The surge protection prompt an alarm
module is abnormal. indicating that the
The SPD window is SPD circuit breaker is
red. not turned on.
● Check whether the
SPD ground cable is
properly connected.
● Replace the surge
protection module.
For details, see 6.4.2.1
Replacing a Surge
Protection Module.

The general switch is The input power supply Check the UPS input
ON, the LCD displays no is not connected. power cable connection.
information, and the
system does not perform The input voltage is less Use a voltmeter to check
self-check. than the lower threshold whether the UPS input
or greater than the voltage meets
upper threshold. requirements.

The mains is normal, but The UPS mains switch is Turn on the UPS mains
the AC input indicator is OFF. switch.
off. The UPS works in
battery mode. The input cable is not Check the UPS input
properly connected. power cable connection.

The UPS fails to ● The UPS ● Reconnect the UPS

communicate. communications cable communications
is not properly cable.
connected. ● Reconnect the UPS
● The UPS parallel cable parallel cable.
is not properly ● Remove the network
connected. cable from the MON1
● The UPS is deleted on port on the UPS,
the ECC800-Pro reinstall the cable,
WebUI. and add the UPS on
the ECC800-Pro
WebUI.

The UPS does not report The output cable is not Check the output power
a fault but has no output properly connected. cable connection.
voltage.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 263
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Symptom Possible Cause Measure

The UPS does not start is not pressed long Press for more than
after you press . enough. 5 seconds until you hear
a beep sound.

The UPS is overloaded. Shut down all loads, and

restart the UPS.

The mains indicator is The mains voltage or Use a multimeter to

off. frequency exceeds the verify that the input
UPS input range. voltage and frequency
meet specifications.

The battery discharge Batteries are not fully Charge batteries for
time is obviously shorter charged. more than 8 hours when
than the standard time. the mains is normal. Test
the discharge time again.

The battery performance Contact your local

deteriorates. Huawei technical
support to replace
batteries.

Abnormal noise or smell The UPS is faulty. Shut down the UPS and
is generated in the UPS cut off the power input
cabinet. immediately. Contact
your local Huawei
technical support.

The battery indicator ● The UPS will soon ● Save load data
blinks. The buzzer buzzes shut down due to immediately and shut
1 second and then stops insufficient battery down primary loads
1 second. The battery reserve, and loads will to avoid data loss or
reserve is insufficient. be powered off. damage.
The UPS is about to shut ● The number of ● Connect the UPS
down. batteries and battery input to the backup
capacity are AC power supply
incorrectly set. immediately.
● Verify that the
number of batteries
and battery capacity
are correctly set based
on the actual
configuration.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 264
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Symptom Possible Cause Measure

The user forgot the None ● If the user forgot only

password. the LCD password
(the preset password
is 000001), use the
feature code (the
preset feature code is
999999) to activate
the LCD password.
● If the user forgot the
LCD password and
feature code, contact
your local Huawei
technical support.

6.2.2 Management System Troubleshooting

Table 6-5 Common faults and troubleshooting for PSUs
Symptom Possible Cause Measure

The power indicator No AC input Check whether the AC

(green) is off. input is abnormal.

PSU fault Replace the PSU.

The alarm indicator Overtemperature ● The ambient

(yellow) is steady on. protection temperature exceeds
the upper threshold.
Increase the cooling
capacity of the smart
cooling product.
● The air channel is
blocked. Unblock it.

AC input overvoltage or Check whether the AC

undervoltage protection input is abnormal.

The Alarm indicator PSU communication 1. Clean the connector

(yellow) is blinking. failure in the rear of the
faulty PSU.
Monitoring module
communication failure 2. If the fault persists,
replace the ECC800-
Pro subrack.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 265
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Symptom Possible Cause Measure

The alarm indicator (red) Output overvoltage ● If a single PSU is

is steady on. protection locked out, disconnect
the AC input from the
PSU, and then power
on the PSU again
after the indicator
turns off. If the fault
persists, replace the
PSU.
● If multiple PSUs are
locked out, remove all
PSUs and reinstall
them one by one to
locate the faulty ones.
Then replace faulty
PSUs.

No output due to a PSU Replace the faulty PSU.

fault

Table 6-6 Common faults and troubleshooting for the monitoring module
No. Symptom Possible Cause Measure

1 The running There is no AC input. If the green indicators

indicator (green) on PSUs are steady
is off. on, the power input to
the system is normal.
Otherwise, rectify
power grid faults.

The monitoring Reinstall the

module is faulty or monitoring module. If
not securely installed. the fault persists,
replace the monitoring
module.

2 RJ45 power The corresponding Energize

output indicators power ports have no corresponding power
are off (involved output. ports over the WebUI
ports: AIDI_1– or network
AIDI_5, COM1– management system.
COM4, and DO).
The corresponding Check whether the
power ports are short- connected load is
circuited. short-circuited. If yes,
eliminate the short
circuit.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 266
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

No. Symptom Possible Cause Measure

3 The ALM Faults and alarms are View active alarms on

indicator (red) is generated. the WebUI and clear
steady on. them one by one.

6.3 Alarm References

NOTE

This section provides only measures to clear major and critical alarms for certain
components. For details about other alarms, see the ECC800-Pro WebUI.

Table 6-7 Alarm list

Component Alarm Name Alarm Possible Cause Measures
Severit
y

Surge SPD fault Major A surge protection Replace the surge

protective module is damaged or protection module or
device (SPD) the SPD circuit breaker switch on the SPD
has tripped. circuit breaker.

UPS Rectifier fault Critical ● The mains has ● Rectify the fault, and
experienced a power on the UPS
transient high again.
voltage. ● Check that the load
● The output carries types are supported
special loads such as by the UPS.
the inductive and ● Enable the
rectification loads. transformer mode.
● The output carries ● Contact technical
the transformer load support.
but the transformer
mode is not enabled.
● The hardware is
damaged.

Internal fault Critical The bypass input cable Correct the bypass input
connection does not cable connection so that
match the output it matches the output
system. system.

Fan fault Critical The fan is abnormal. Clean up foreign matter

around the fan. If the
fault persists, contact
technical support.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 267
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Component Alarm Name Alarm Possible Cause Measures

Severit
y

Inverter fault Critical The inverter output Eliminate the short-

short-circuits. circuit cable at the
output port, and then
power on and start the
inverter again. If the
fault persists, contact
technical support.

Intelligent Communication Critical The network cable Check the cable

lithium Failure communication is connection to the smart
battery interrupted. ETH gateway.
monitoring
system BCB Tripping Critical ● The battery has Identify the alarm
discharged to the cause, rectify the fault,
end-of-discharge and switch on the BCB
(EOD) threshold. box.
● The battery circuit
breaker (BCB) box is
manually
disconnected.
● There is a security
risk in the battery
loop.

Single Batt. Critical ● A battery terminal ● Check that battery

terminal off screw is not terminal screws are
tightened. tightened.
● The battery terminal ● Check that battery
is not properly terminals are
connected to the properly connected
connector. to connectors.

Single Batt. Critical ● The battery shell is ● Check whether the

Exception broken, resulting in appearances of
electrolyte and abnormal batteries
electricity leakage. are intact, and
● The battery loop replace abnormal
cable is broken and batteries.
short-circuited to the ● Check whether
ground, resulting in battery loop cables
electricity leakage. are deteriorated or
broken, and replace
faulty cables.

6.4 Parts Replacement

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 268
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

6.4.1 Replacing Structural System Components

6.4.1.1 Replacing a Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock

Prerequisites
● Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver
● Material: A spare cabinet electronic clasp lock is available and functional.

Context
Cabinet electronic clasp locks are installed at the front and rear doors of a cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Open the front or rear door of the cabinet.

Step 2 Remove the signal cables from the cabinet electronic clasp lock.

Step 3 Remove the cabinet electronic clasp lock bolts using an insulated Phillips
screwdriver.

Figure 6-1 Removing a cabinet electronic clasp lock

Step 4 Install the new cabinet electronic clasp lock at the front or rear door of a cabinet.

NOTE

● Before removing a cabinet electronic clasp lock, remember the DIP switch settings on
the cabinet electronic clasp lock. Ensure that the DIP switch settings on the new cabinet
electronic clasp lock are the same as those on the old cabinet electronic clasp lock.
● The mounting holes for the new cabinet electronic clasp lock are slotted holes. If the
door cannot be properly closed after installation, adjust the lock height based on site
requirements.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 269
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Step 5 Reconnect the cables to the cabinet electronic clasp lock.

----End

6.4.1.2 Replacing a Gas Spring

Prerequisites
● Tools: Phillips screwdriver, step ladder
● Material: A spare gas spring is available and functional.

Context
Gas springs are installed on the top of a cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Open the front or rear door of the cabinet.
Step 2 Remove the nuts from the gas spring using an adjustable wrench.
Step 3 Remove the gas springs.

Figure 6-2 Removing a gas spring

Step 4 Tighten the new air spring using an adjustable wrench.

----End

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 270
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

6.4.2 Replacing Power Supply and Distribution System

Components

DANGER

● Only qualified personnel can replace components of the power supply and
distribution system.
● Wear protective tools such as insulation gloves and shoes before replacing a
power supply and distribution component.
● Power off the upper-level equipment before replacing a power supply and
distribution component.
● Use a multimeter and electrical tester pen to check whether the front and rear
ends of the component to be replaced are powered off after the component is
powered off.

6.4.2.1 Replacing a Surge Protection Module

Prerequisites

DANGER

● Do not replace a surge protection module during a thunderstorm.

● Before replacing a surge protection module, wear insulation gloves.

● Tools: protective insulation gloves, electroprobe

● Material: A new surge protection module of the same model is available and
functional.

Procedure
Step 1 Switch the SPD circuit breaker to OFF.
Step 2 Remove the protective panel from the SPD.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 271
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Figure 6-3 Removing the protective panel

Step 3 Detect the L/N and N/L voltages to the PE using an electroprobe, as shown in
Figure 6-4. Verify that the faulty SPD has no voltage before replacing the faulty
surge protection module.

Figure 6-4 Measuring voltage

Step 4 Hold the faulty surge protection module and pull it out, as shown in Figure 6-5.

DANGER

During replacement, do not touch the energized components in the power

distribution subrack.

Figure 6-5 Replacing a surge protection module

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 272
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Step 5 Install the new surge protection module.

Step 6 Reinstall the protective panel for the SPD, and switch on the SPD circuit breaker.
Step 7 Check whether there are alarms on the ECC800-Pro. If there is no alarm, the surge
protection module is functional.

----End

6.4.2.2 Replacing a Fuse

Prerequisites

CAUTION

When replacing a fuse, wear insulation gloves and do not touch the input copper
bar.

● Tool: insulation gloves

● Material: The new fuse of the same model is available and functional.

Procedure
Step 1 Shake the fuse terminal block gently, pull it out, and push it outwards.
NOTE

Fuses can be replaced in a similar way. The following figure is for reference only.

Figure 6-6 Opening the fuse terminal block

Step 2 Reinstall the fuse terminal block in the power distribution subrack.
Step 3 Close the fuse terminal block.
Step 4 Observe the indicator. If the indicator is on, the fuse is functional.

----End

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 273
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

6.4.2.3 Replacing an rPDU

Prerequisites
● Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, step ladder
● Material: A spare rPDU of the same model is available and functional.

Context
An rPDU is installed at the rear door of a cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Open the rear door of the cabinet.

Step 2 Switch off the output circuit breaker of the power distribution subrack for the
rPDU. Disconnect the power cables and signal cables from the rPDU terminal
block.

Step 3 Remove the bolts that secure the rPDU using an insulated Phillips screwdriver.

Step 4 Secure the new rPDU to the rear door of the cabinet.

Step 5 Reconnect the power cables or signal cables to the rPDU, and switch on the circuit
breaker of the power distribution subrack.

----End

6.4.2.4 Replacing a Transformer

Prerequisites
● Tools: electroprobe, insulated gloves, insulated Phillips screwdriver, multimeter
● Material: A spare transformer of the same model is available and functional.
● The transformer is damaged or faulty and cannot work.

Procedure
Step 1 Open the front and rear doors of the Converged Cabinet.

Step 2 Switch off all circuit breakers in the cabinet and the mains input circuit breaker.

NOTICE

This step results in service interruptions.

Step 3 Remove the EPO signal cable connected to the UPS, and then remove the cables
of the transformer.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 274
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

NOTICE

After removing cables, wrap exposed terminals with insulation tape and do not
block cable labels. If cable labels are blocked, cables may be connected incorrectly
later.

Step 4 Remove the screws at the front of the transformer.

Figure 6-7 Removing screws at the front of the transformer

Step 5 Remove the screws at the rear of the transformer and pull out the old transformer.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 275
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Figure 6-8 Removing screws at the rear of the transformer

Step 6 Install the new transformer and secure it to the cabinet using screws.

Step 7 Connect the cables of the transformer in sequence. Check whether the cable labels
are consistent with the marks on the wiring terminals and whether all cables are
connected.

Step 8 Switch on the mains input circuit breaker.

Step 9 Switch on the UPS input circuit breaker and the SPD circuit breaker.

Step 10 Start the UPS and the inverter, and then turn on the UPS output switch.

Step 11 Switch on the load circuit breaker.

Step 12 Check whether the UPS generates abnormal alarms. If there is any alarm, clear it
and start the UPS.

----End

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 276
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

6.4.2.5 Replacing a UPS2000-H

Prerequisites
● Tools: electroprobe, insulated gloves, insulated Phillips screwdriver, multimeter
● Materials: A spare UPS of the same model is available and functional.
● The UPS is damaged or faulty and cannot work.

Step 1 Ensure that the TN system is reliably grounded, and that the main ground cable of
the smart module is reliably connected.

NOTICE

After removing cables, wrap exposed terminals with insulation tape and do not
block cable labels. If cable labels are blocked, cables may be connected incorrectly.

Step 2 Turn off the battery switch, or remove the wiring terminal between the battery
and the faulty UPS.

Step 3 Open the front door of the cabinet, remove the protective panel from the
maintenance bypass switch, and manually turn on the maintenance bypass switch.
(The UPS automatically transfers to the static bypass mode, and an alarm is
generated, indicating that the maintenance bypass switch is turned on.)

Step 4 Turn off the corresponding UPS input and output switches. Use a multimeter to
check whether the UPS input and output terminals and battery terminals are de-
energized.

Step 5 Remove the rear cover from the UPS, and remove the input and output power
cables, battery cables (or battery pack cables), and signal cables.

NOTICE

Wrap the exposed cable with insulation tape.

Step 6 Remove screws from the UPS front panel, and pull out the UPS.

Step 7 Install the new UPS and screw it to the cabinet.

Step 8 Connect the output power cables, signal cables, and UPS input power cables in
sequence. Check whether the cable labels are consistent with the silk screens on
the UPS, and whether all cables are connected.

NOTICE

Do not connect the manual bypass switch (MBS) signal cable to the UPS rear at
present.

Step 9 Start the UPS and set related parameters.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 277
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Step 10 Turn on the UPS input switch. When the output switch is off, start the inverter.
After checking that the UPS starts normally, shut down the inverter. The UPS
transfers to static bypass mode at this moment. After that, turn on the UPS output
switch, and turn off the manual maintenance bypass switch. Then the loads are
energized by the UPS bypass.

Step 11 Install the protective cover, and connect the MBS signal cable to the UPS rear.

Step 12 Check whether the UPS generates abnormal alarms. If there are alarms, clear
them and start the UPS.

Step 13 Connect the battery cables (or battery pack cables) and turn on the battery
switch.

----End

6.4.2.6 Replacing a Lithium Battery

Prerequisites
● Tools: insulation gloves, insulated Phillips screwdriver, socket wrench
● Material: a new and intact lithium battery
● The gyroscope function is disabled.

NOTICE

Before the replacement, ensure that the loads are not affected or a written
consent is obtained from the customer.

Procedure
Step 1 Switch the BAT– battery circuit breaker in the power system to OFF or remove the
battery fuse.

Step 2 Press the MANUAL ON/OFF button on the battery to turn off the battery output.

Step 3 Disconnect the cables from the old battery. Insulate each cable and label it
immediately after disconnecting it.

Step 4 Loosen the screws on the panel and remove the battery.

Step 5 Install the new battery and tighten the screws.

Step 6 Hold down the Manual ON/OFF button for 15s for the battery to enter the
maintenance mode. In this mode, all indicators blink, the battery board is
activated, but the battery is not charged or discharged.

Step 7 Connect the cables to the new battery based on the cable labels.

Step 8 Switch the BAT– battery circuit breaker in the power system to ON or reinstall the
battery fuse using a fuse extracting unit.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 278
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Step 9 Hold down the Manual ON/OFF button for 15s for the battery to exit the
maintenance mode. The battery is automatically activated and connects to the
power system.

----End

6.4.3 Replacing Cooling System Components

The following figure shows the cooling system components.

Figure 6-9 Cooling system components

(1) High pressure (2) High pressure (3) Pressure gauge (4) External circulation
sensor switch fan

(5) Electronic (6) Liquid pipe (7) Low pressure (8) Gas pipe
expansion valve (EEV) sensor

(9) Internal circulation (10) Low pressure (11) Compressor (12) Drainpipe
fan switch

6.4.3.1 Replacing an Internal Circulation Fan

Prerequisites
● Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, diagonal pliers or scissors
● An internal circulation fan needs to be replaced.
● A spare internal circulation fan of the same model is available and functional.

Context
The fan is maintained from the top.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 279
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Procedure
Step 1 Shut down the smart cooling product.
● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro PAD app as user admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Choose Settings and enable High-Risk Permission.
c. In the smart module view, tap the cabinet where the smart cooling
product is located.
d. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
e. Choose Real-time Data > OFF.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000 > Controls > Control Information,
choose Power on/off > Off, and then click Submit.
NOTE

The last digit of the model displayed on the screen is variable and subject to change
with the smart cooling product connection sequence. The displayed value is the actual
one.

Step 2 Disconnect the power supply from the smart cooling product control unit after the
smart cooling product is shut down.
Step 3 Remove the screws that secure the top panel using an insulated Phillips
screwdriver, and remove the top panel.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 280
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Figure 6-10 Removing screws from the top panel

Step 4 Remove the four M4 screws from the fan baffle plate using an insulated Phillips
screwdriver, and remove the fan baffle plate.

Step 5 (Optional) Cut the cable tie securing the NTC sensor on the fan top panel using
scissors or diagonal pliers, and remove the NTC sensor.
Step 6 Cut the cable tie securing the fan terminal using scissors or diagonal pliers and
pull out the fan terminal.
Step 7 Remove the sheet metal fastener bolts from the fan support using a socket
wrench, remove the nuts from the fan using an adjustable wrench, and remove
the fan.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 281
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Figure 6-11 Removing the fan

Step 8 Install the new fan in the original position by performing the preceding steps in
reverse order.

Step 9 After powering on the smart cooling product, log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as
user admin, choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000 > Controls > Control
Information, choose Power on/off > On, and click Submit.

Step 10 Choose Monitoring > Cooling > Running Parameters > Parameter Setting, tap
Advanced, set Diagnostic Mode to Open, and click Submit.

Step 11 Set Diagnostic Indoor Fan to 50% and click Submit. If the internal circulation fan
works properly and there is no alarm, the internal circulation fan is functional. Set
Diagnostic Indoor Fan to 0% and click Submit.

Step 12 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Power on/off to Off, and click
Submit.

----End

6.4.3.2 Replacing a PSU, Rectifier, or Main Control Module

Prerequisites
● A PSU, rectifier, or main control module needs to be replaced.
● A spare PSU, rectifier, or main control module of the same model is available
and functional.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 282
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Context
● The PSU, rectifier, and main control module can be replaced in the same way.
This section describes how to replace a PSU.
● To replace the main control module, download the software and Software
Upgrade Guide from Huawei websites, and upgrade it on the PAD or ECC800-
Pro.
● Figure 6-12 shows the front panel of a smart cooling product control unit.

Figure 6-12 Front panel of the smart cooling product control unit

(1) Ground point (2) Rectifier (3) PSU

(4) FE_2 (5) FE_1 (6) CAN_IN (input port of the

teamwork CAN and
northbound RS485 port)

(7) RS485/12 V port for (8) USB port (9) DP (display port)
connecting the T/H sensor

(10) COM/FE (northbound (11) CAN_OUT (output port of (12) Main control module
RS485 port and FE port) the teamwork CAN and
northbound RS485 port)

Procedure
Step 1 Shut down the smart cooling product.
● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro PAD app as user admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Choose Settings and enable High-Risk Permission.
c. In the smart module view, tap the cabinet where the smart cooling
product is located.
d. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
e. Choose Real-time Data > OFF.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control Information,
choose Startup/Shutdown control > OFF, and then click Submit.
NOTE

1 in NetCol5000-A1 is variable and subject to change with the smart cooling product
connection sequence. The displayed value is the actual one.

Step 2 Disconnect the power supply from the smart cooling product control unit after the
smart cooling product is shut down.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 283
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Step 3 Flip the clip on the PSU leftwards, as shown by (1) in Figure 6-13.

Figure 6-13 Removing a PSU

Step 4 Take out the handle and pull out the PSU from the subrack, as shown by (2) in
Figure 6-13.

Step 5 Insert the spare PSU into the corresponding slot, and flip the clip up to lock the
PSU.

Step 6 Start the device.

● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro mobile phone or PAD app as user admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. In the smart module view, tap the cabinet where the smart cooling
product is located.
c. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
d. Choose Real-time Data > ON.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control Information,
choose Startup/Shutdown control > ON, and then click Submit.

Step 7 Ensure that no alarm is generated for the smart cooling product after it runs for
30 minutes.

----End

6.4.3.3 Replacing an NTC Temperature Sensor

Prerequisites
● Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver (optional, required for removing the air
director and fan baffle plate), diagonal pliers or scissors
● An NTC temperature sensor needs to be replaced.
● A spare NTC temperature sensor of the same model is available and
functional.

Procedure
Step 1 Shut down the smart cooling product.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 284
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro PAD app as user admin.

a. Choose Home.
b. Choose Settings and enable High-Risk Permission.
c. In the smart module view, tap the cabinet where the smart cooling
product is located.
d. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
e. Choose Real-time Data > OFF.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000 > Controls > Control Information,
choose Startup/Shutdown control > OFF, and then click Submit.
NOTE

The last digit of the model displayed on the screen is variable and subject to change
with the smart cooling product connection sequence. The displayed value is the actual
one.

Step 2 Disconnect the power supply from the smart cooling product control unit after the
smart cooling product is shut down.
Step 3 Remove the top panel and air filter.
Step 4 Remove the interconnection terminal from the NTC temperature sensor.
Step 5 Use an insulated Phillips screwdriver to loosen the NTC cable clip and remove the
NTC temperature sensor.
Step 6 Install the new NTC temperature sensor in the original position by performing the
preceding steps in reverse order, and install the top panel and air filter.
Step 7 After powering on the smart cooling product, log in to the ECC800 WebUI as user
admin, choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000 > Controls > Control
Information, set Startup/Shutdown control to ON, and click Submit.
Step 8 Choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000 > Running Information, click
Advanced and check whether the value of Supply air temperature is appropriate.

----End

6.4.3.4 Replacing a Low Pressure Sensor

Prerequisites
● Tools: an 11# solid wrench and a 27# solid wrench (or two adjustable
wrenches), insulated Phillips screwdriver, diagonal pliers or scissors, refrigerant
retrieval device (required based on local conditions), nitrogen injection and
pressure preservation tool, vacuumization tool, refrigerant injection tool, cable
tie, sealant
● A low pressure sensor needs to be replaced.
● A spare low pressure sensor of the same model is available and functional.

Context
The low pressure sensor is maintained from the top.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 285
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Procedure
Step 1 Shut down the smart cooling product.
● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro PAD app as user admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Choose Settings and enable High-Risk Permission.
c. In the smart module view, tap the cabinet where the smart cooling
product is located.
d. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
e. Choose Real-time Data > OFF.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control Information,
choose Startup/Shutdown control > OFF, and then click Submit.
NOTE

1 in NetCol5000-A1 is variable and subject to change with the smart cooling product
connection sequence. The displayed value is the actual one.

Step 2 Disconnect the power supply from the smart cooling product control unit after the
smart cooling product is shut down.
Step 3 Reclaim the refrigerant.
Step 4 Remove the interconnection terminal from the low pressure sensor.
Step 5 Use diagonal pliers to cut off the cable ties that secure the low pressure sensor
cable, and remove the low pressure sensor cable.
Step 6 Remove the low pressure sensor using adjustable wrenches.
1. When replacing the low pressure sensor, use one adjustable wrench to fix the
bottom needle valve of the sensor, and use another adjustable wrench to
rotate the sensor counter-clockwise.
NOTE

If it is difficult to remove the sensor, use a heat gun to heat the threads.
2. After removing the sensor, clear the sealant remaining on the threads.
Step 7 Apply sealant to the threads to be connected. Install a new low pressure sensor in
the original position using an adjustable wrench and connect the cable.
Step 8 Install the interconnection terminal of the low pressure sensor, and secure the low
pressure sensor cable using cable ties.
Step 9 Inject nitrogen and preserve the pressure. After checking that the low pressure
sensor and system do not leak, perform vacuumization and inject refrigerant.
Step 10 After powering on the smart cooling product, log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as
user admin, choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls >
Control Information, set Startup/Shutdown control to ON, and click Submit.
Step 11 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Enter, and click
Submit
Step 12 Choose Running Parameters > Diagnostic Mode Parameters, set Comp manual
control to 3000 rpm, and click Submit. Choose Running Info > Compressor

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 286
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Information, and read the value of Suction pressure. Check whether the suction
pressure of the compressor is within the proper range. The proper range of the air
suction pressure is 0.7–1.6 MPa.

Step 13 Set Comp manual control to 0 rpm and click Submit.

Step 14 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Exit, and click
Submit.

----End

6.4.3.5 Replacing a Contactor

Prerequisites
● Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, small-sized flat-head screwdriver
● A contactor needs to be replaced.
● A spare contactor of the same model is available and functional.

Context
The contactor is maintained from the rear.

Procedure
Step 1 Shut down the smart cooling product.
● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro PAD app as user admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Choose Settings and enable High-Risk Permission.
c. In the smart module view, tap the cabinet where the smart cooling
product is located.
d. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
e. Choose Real-time Data > OFF.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control Information,
choose Startup/Shutdown control > OFF, and then click Submit.
NOTE

1 in NetCol5000-A1 is variable and subject to change with the smart cooling product
connection sequence. The displayed value is the actual one.

Step 2 Disconnect the power supply from the smart cooling product control unit after the
smart cooling product is shut down.

Step 3 Remove the cover from the electric control box using an insulated Phillips
screwdriver, remove the cable from the contactor using a small-sized flat-head
screwdriver, and remove the contactor, as shown in Figure 6-14.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 287
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Figure 6-14 Removing a contactor

Step 4 Install a new contactor in the original position by performing the preceding steps
in reverse order, and connect the cable.

Step 5 After powering on the smart cooling product, log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as
user admin, choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls >
Control Information, set Startup/Shutdown control to ON, and click Submit.

Step 6 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Enter, and click
Submit.

Step 7 Choose Running Parameters > Diagnostic Mode Parameters, set Elec heater
manual control to ON, and click Submit. If hot air blows out from the air exhaust
vent of the fan after a period of time, the electric heater runs properly. Set Elec
heater manual control to Closed and click Submit. No hot air blows out after a
period of time.

Step 8 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Exit, and click
Submit.

----End

6.4.3.6 Replacing an EEV and Coil

Prerequisites
● Tools: flat-head screwdriver, welding tool, refrigerant retrieval device (required
based on local conditions), nitrogen injection and pressure preservation tool,
vacuumization tool, refrigerant injection tool.
● An EEV and its coil need to be replaced.
● A spare EEV and a coil of the same model are available and functional.

Context
● The EEV and coil are maintained from the rear.
● The silk screen of the electronic expansion valve is EEV.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 288
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Procedure
Step 1 Shut down the smart cooling product.
● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro PAD app as user admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Choose Settings and enable High-Risk Permission.
c. In the smart module view, tap the cabinet where the smart cooling
product is located.
d. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
e. Choose Real-time Data > OFF.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > FusionCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control
Information, choose Startup/Shutdown control > OFF, and then click
Submit.
NOTE

1 in FusionCol-A1 is variable and subject to change with the smart cooling product
connection sequence. The displayed value is the actual one.

Step 2 Disconnect the power supply from the smart cooling product control unit after the
smart cooling product is shut down.

Step 3 Reclaim the refrigerant.

Step 4 Pry the EEV coil off using a flat-head screwdriver, as shown in Figure 6-15.

Figure 6-15 Removing the EEV and coil

Step 5 Weld the two ends of the EEV using a welding torch. Then, remove the EEV.

Step 6 Weld a new EEV, and install the coil for the EEV.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 289
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

NOTICE

Protect the surrounding components during the welding process.

Step 7 Inject nitrogen and preserve the pressure. After checking that the EEV and system
do not leak, perform vacuumization and inject refrigerant.

Step 8 After powering on the smart cooling product, log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as
user admin, choose Monitoring > Cooling > FusionCol5000 > Controls > Control
Information, set Startup/Shutdown control to ON, and click Submit.

Step 9 Choose Monitoring > Cooling > FusionCol5000 > Running Parameters >
Parameter Setting, click Advanced, set Diagnostic Mode to Open, and click
Submit. Set Diagnostic Compressor to 3600 rpm.

Step 10 Choose Running Information, click Advanced, read Suction pressure and
Discharge pressure, and check whether the suction pressure and discharge
pressure of the compressor are within the proper ranges. Choose Running Info >
Temperature and Humidity Parameters, click Advanced, and check whether the
value of EEV suct superheat is within the proper range.
NOTE

● The proper range of the suction pressure is 0.7–1.6 MPa, and the pressure ratio
(discharge pressure to suction pressure) is greater than 1.4.
● The proper range of the suction superheat degree is 4°C to 15°C.

Table 6-8 Proper discharge pressure range

Outdoor Ambient Temperature Discharge Pressure Range

< 15°C 1.5–2.5 MPa

15–35°C 1.5–3.1 MPa

35–45°C 2.5–3.8 MPa

> 45°C 3.1–4.0 MPa

Step 11 Set Comp manual control to 0 rpm and click Submit.

Step 12 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Exit, and click
Submit.

----End

6.4.3.7 Replacing an External Circulation Fan

Prerequisites
● An external circulation fan needs to be replaced.
● A spare external circulation fan of the same model is available and functional.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 290
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Context
● Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, small wrench, cable tie, diagonal pliers
● Preparation: Power off the smart cooling product.

Procedure
Step 1 Shut down the smart cooling product.
● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro PAD app as user admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Choose Settings and enable High-Risk Permission.
c. In the smart module view, tap the cabinet where the smart cooling
product is located.
d. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
e. Choose Real-time Data > OFF.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control Information,
choose Startup/Shutdown control > OFF, and then click Submit.
NOTE

1 in NetCol5000-A1 is variable and subject to change with the smart cooling product
connection sequence. The displayed value is the actual one.

Step 2 Disconnect the power supplies from the smart cooling product control unit and
the outdoor unit after the smart cooling product is shut down.
Step 3 Use an insulated Phillips screwdriver to open the top and side panels.

Step 4 Cut the cable ties on the fan cable using diagonal pliers and take out the external
circulation fan cable from the electric control box.
Step 5 Remove the screw from the fan using a small wrench, and remove the external
circulation fan blades, as shown in Figure 6-16.

Figure 6-16 Removing the external circulation fan blades

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 291
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Step 6 Install the new external circulation fan by performing the preceding steps in
reverse order, and connect the fan cable to the corresponding position in the
electric control box.

Step 7 Secure the external circulation fan cable using cable ties.

Step 8 Install the top cover, front panel, and left front panel.

Step 9 After powering on the smart cooling product, log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as
user admin, choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls >
Control Information, set Startup/Shutdown control to ON, and click Submit.

Step 10 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Enter, and click
Submit.

Step 11 Choose Running Parameters > Diagnostic Mode Parameters, set Outdoor fan
output man ctrl to 50%, and click Submit. If the external circulation fan works
properly and there is no alarm, the external circulation fan is functional. Set
Outdoor fan manual control to 0% and click Submit.

Step 12 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Exit, and click
Submit.

Step 13 Clear up the external circulation fan total runtime.

● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro PAD app as user admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. In the smart module view, tap the cabinet where the smart cooling
product is located.
c. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
d. Choose Real-time Data > Controls > Performance Maintenance
Control, and clear up the internal circulation fan total runtime.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Performance
Maintenance Control, and clear up the external circulation fan total runtime.

----End

6.4.3.8 Replacing a Compressor

Prerequisites
● Tools: diagonal pliers or scissors, insulated Phillips screwdriver, 8 mm and 13
mm socket wrenches, welding tool, refrigerant retrieval device (required based
on local conditions), nitrogen injection and pressure preservation tool,
vacuumization tool, refrigerant injection tool, protective gloves.
● A compressor needs to be replaced.
● A spare compressor of the same model is available and functional.

Context
● Before replacing the compressor, disconnect the power supply and discharge
refrigerant from the system.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 292
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

● After the replacement, perform the leakage test with nitrogen, then
vacuumize again and charge refrigerant.
● Reclaim or dispose of the refrigerant in accordance with the local laws and
regulations.
● Remove the left front panel and left rear panel from the outdoor unit when
replacing the compressor.

Procedure
Step 1 Shut down the smart cooling product.
● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro PAD app as user admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Choose Settings and enable High-Risk Permission.
c. In the smart module view, tap the cabinet where the smart cooling
product is located.
d. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
e. Choose Real-time Data > OFF.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control Information,
choose Startup/Shutdown control > OFF, and then click Submit.
NOTE

1 in NetCol5000-A1 is variable and subject to change with the smart cooling product
connection sequence. The displayed value is the actual one.

Step 2 Disconnect the power supplies from the smart cooling product control unit and
the outdoor unit after the smart cooling product is shut down.
Step 3 Reclaim all the refrigerant from the system using a refrigerant reclaiming device
to ensure that there is no pressure inside the system.
NOTE

Discharge the refrigerant if the local laws and regulations allow.

Step 4 Remove the left front panel and right rear panel, and remove the thermal
insulation cover to expose the compressor completely.
Step 5 Remove the nut from the connection box on top of the compressor using an 8 mm
socket wrench, and disconnect the cable.
Step 6 Remove the inductor cable and oil heating belt from the compressor.
Step 7 Weld from the suction and discharge pipe welding points shown in Figure 6-17.
Remove the discharge pipe that connects the compressor to the oil separator, and
then remove the suction pipe.

NOTICE

To avoid burning the internal components, other pipes, thermal insulation foam,
power cables, and labels, take protective measures, such as spreading wet cloth,
around the welding position.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 293
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Step 8 Remove the three bolts from the compressor base using a 13 mm socket wrench,
and remove the compressor.

Figure 6-17 Position of the compressor

(1) High pressure (2) High pressure (3) Pressure gauge (4) External circulation
sensor switch fan

(5) EEV (6) Liquid pipe (7) Low pressure (8) Gas pipe
sensor

(9) Internal circulation (10) Low pressure (11) Compressor (12) Drainpipe
fan switch

Step 9 Remove the rubber plugs from the suction and discharge pipes of the new
compressor, and use a 13 mm socket wrench to tighten the bolts on the base to
secure the new compressor bound with an oil heating belt to the base.
Step 10 Weld the suction and discharge pipes again using a welding tool and reconnect
the compressor cable and ground cable.

NOTICE

The connection box cover is marked U, V, and W. Connect cables according to the
cable sequence and color (red for U, black for V, and blue for W).

Step 11 Reinstall the oil heating belt, secure it using cable ties, and put a thermal
insulation cover on the compressor.
Step 12 Perform a leakage test with nitrogen again. After checking that the smart cooling
product does not leak, vacuumize the smart cooling product and charge
refrigerant.
Step 13 Reinstall the left front panel and right rear panel.
Step 14 After powering on the smart cooling product, log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as
user admin, choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls >
Control Information, set Startup/Shutdown control to ON, and click Submit.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 294
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Step 15 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Enter, and click
Submit.

Step 16 Choose Running Parameters > Diagnostic Mode Parameters, set Comp manual
control to 3000 rpm, and click Submit. Choose Running Info > Compressor
Information, and read the suction pressure and discharge pressure. Check
whether the suction and discharge pressures of the compressor are within the
proper ranges. Choose Running Info > Electronic Expansion Valve Information.
Check that the EEV suction overheating degree is within the proper range.
NOTE

● The proper range of the suction pressure is 0.7–1.6 MPa, and the pressure ratio
(discharge pressure to suction pressure) is greater than 1.4.
● Table 6-9 lists the proper ranges of discharge pressure.
● The proper range of the suction superheat degree is 4°C to 15°C.

Table 6-9 Proper discharge pressure range

Outdoor Ambient Temperature Discharge Pressure Range

< 15°C 1.5–2.5 MPa

15–35°C 1.5–3.1 MPa

35–45°C 2.5–3.8 MPa

> 45°C 3.1–4.0 MPa

Step 17 Set Comp manual control to 0 rpm and click Submit.

Step 18 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Exit, and click
Submit.

Step 19 Clear up the compressor total runtime.

● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro PAD app as user admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. In the smart module view, tap the cabinet where the smart cooling
product is located.
c. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
d. Choose Real-time Data > Controls > Performance Maintenance
Control, and clear up the internal circulation fan total runtime.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Performance
Maintenance Control, and clear up the compressor total runtime.

----End

6.4.3.9 Replacing a High Pressure Sensor

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 295
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Prerequisites
● A high pressure sensor needs to be replaced.
● A spare high pressure sensor of the same model is available and functional.

Context
● Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, refrigerant retrieval device (required
based on local conditions), nitrogen injection and pressure preservation tool,
vacuumization tool, refrigerant injection tool, adjustable wrench, sealant
● Preparation: Power off the outdoor unit.

Procedure
Step 1 Shut down the smart cooling product.
● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro PAD app as user admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Choose Settings and enable High-Risk Permission.
c. In the smart module view, tap the cabinet where the smart cooling
product is located.
d. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
e. Choose Real-time Data > OFF.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control Information,
choose Startup/Shutdown control > OFF, and then click Submit.
NOTE

1 in NetCol5000-A1 is variable and subject to change with the smart cooling product
connection sequence. The displayed value is the actual one.

Step 2 Disconnect the power supplies from the smart cooling product control unit and
the outdoor unit after the smart cooling product is shut down.

Step 3 Open the top cover and right rear panel.

Step 4 Cut the cable ties on the high pressure sensor cable using diagonal pliers and take
out the high pressure sensor cable from the electric control box.

Step 5 Reclaim all the refrigerant from the system using a refrigerant reclaiming device
to ensure that there is no pressure inside the system.
NOTE

Discharge the refrigerant if the local laws and regulations allow.

Step 6 Remove the high pressure sensor using an adjustable wrench.

Step 7 Apply sealant to the threads of the new high pressure sensor. Install a new high
pressure sensor in the original position using an adjustable wrench and connect
the cable.

Step 8 Secure the high pressure sensor cable using cable ties.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 296
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Step 9 Perform a leakage test with nitrogen again. After checking that the smart cooling
product does not leak, vacuumize the smart cooling product and charge
refrigerant.

Step 10 Reinstall the right rear panel and top cover.

Step 11 After powering on the smart cooling product, log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as
user admin, choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls >
Control Information, set Startup/Shutdown control to ON, and click Submit.

Step 12 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Enter, and click
Submit.

Step 13 Choose Running Parameters > Diagnostic Mode Parameters, set Comp manual
control to 3000 rpm, and click Submit. Choose Running Info > Compressor
Information, and read the suction pressure and discharge pressure. Check
whether the suction and discharge pressures of the compressor are within the
proper ranges. Choose Running Info > Electronic Expansion Valve Information.
Check that the EEV suction overheating degree is within the proper range.
NOTE

● The proper range of the suction pressure is 0.7–1.6 MPa, and the pressure ratio
(discharge pressure to suction pressure) is greater than 1.4.
● For details about the proper range of the discharge pressure, see 6.4.3.6 Replacing an
EEV and Coil.
● The proper range of the suction superheat degree is 4°C to 15°C.

Step 14 Set Comp manual control to 0 rpm and click Submit.

Step 15 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Exit, and click
Submit.

----End

6.4.3.10 Replacing a Pneumatic Switch

Prerequisites
● The pneumatic switch needs to be replaced.
● A spare pneumatic switch of the same model is available and functional.

Context
● This section describes how to replace a high pressure switch or a low pressure
switch at the outdoor side. Identify and replace the switch that is damaged.
● Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, flat-head screwdriver, socket wrench,
diagonal pliers, welding tool, refrigerant retrieval device (required based on
local conditions), nitrogen injection and pressure preservation tool,
vacuumization tool, refrigerant injection tool
● Preparation: Power off the outdoor unit and retrieve the refrigerant in the
system.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 297
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Procedure
Step 1 Shut down the smart cooling product.
● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro PAD app as user admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Choose Settings and enable High-Risk Permission.
c. In the smart module view, tap the cabinet where the smart cooling
product is located.
d. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
e. Choose Real-time Data > OFF.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control Information,
choose Startup/Shutdown control > OFF, and then click Submit.
NOTE

1 in NetCol5000-A1 is variable and subject to change with the smart cooling product
connection sequence. The displayed value is the actual one.

Step 2 Disconnect the power supplies from the smart cooling product control unit and
the outdoor unit after the smart cooling product is shut down.
Step 3 Reclaim all the refrigerant from the system using a refrigerant reclaiming device
to ensure that there is no pressure inside the system.
NOTE

Discharge the refrigerant if the local laws and regulations allow.

Step 4 Open the top cover and right rear panel.

Step 5 Cut the cable ties on the pneumatic switch cable using diagonal pliers and take
out the pneumatic switch cable from the electric control box.
Step 6 Remove the pneumatic switch using a welding torch.

NOTICE

To avoid burning the internal components, other pipes, thermal insulation foam,
power cables, and labels, take protective measures, such as spreading wet cloth,
around the welding position.

Step 7 Weld the new pneumatic switch using a welding torch and connect cables.
Step 8 Secure the pneumatic switch cable using cable ties.
Step 9 Perform a leakage test with nitrogen again. After checking that the smart cooling
product does not leak, vacuumize the smart cooling product and charge
refrigerant.
Step 10 Reinstall the right rear panel and top cover.
Step 11 After powering on the smart cooling product, log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as
user admin, choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls >
Control Information, set Startup/Shutdown control to ON, and click Submit.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 298
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Step 12 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Enter, and click
Submit.

Step 13 Choose Running Parameters > Diagnostic Mode Parameters, set Comp manual
control to 3000 rpm, and click Submit. Choose Running Info > Compressor
Information, and read the suction pressure and discharge pressure. Check
whether the suction and discharge pressures of the compressor are within the
proper ranges. Choose Running Info > Electronic Expansion Valve Information.
Check that the EEV suction overheating degree is within the proper range.
NOTE

● The proper range of the suction pressure is 0.7–1.6 MPa, and the pressure ratio
(discharge pressure to suction pressure) is greater than 1.4.
● For details about the proper range of the discharge pressure, see 6.4.3.6 Replacing an
EEV and Coil.
● The proper range of the air suction superheat degree is 4°C to 15°C.

Step 14 Set Comp manual control to 0 rpm and click Submit.

Step 15 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Exit, and click
Submit.

----End

6.4.4 Replacing Management System Components

1. After replacing components, log in to the WebUI and choose Maintenance >
Parameter Sync to access the parameter synchronization page.
2. Click Device type and select the component type from the drop-down list.
3. Select the failure device in Source Device, select the reserved device in Target
Device, and click Submit to synchronize the configuration parameters of the
failure device to the reserved device.
4. On the Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Controls tab page, select Delete
device with communication failure and click Submit, add the reserved
device to the smart module view.

6.4.4.1 Replacing an ECC800-Pro Main Control Module

Prerequisites

NOTICE

● The ECC800-Pro main control module is hot-swappable.

● Before disconnecting cables from the ECC800-Pro main control module, label
the cables based on the corresponding ports.

● Tools: ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves, insulated Phillips screwdriver, label, marker
● Materials: a new undamaged and undeformed ECC800-Pro main control
module of the appropriate model

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 299
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Use the Back Up Current Settings function to record the ECC800-Pro
configuration information or manually record the information.
Path: Maintenance > Configuration File > Back Up Current Settings

NOTE

If the main control module is damaged, you may fail to log in to the ECC800-Pro. In this case,
you cannot back up the settings.
The following information cannot be backed up: monitoring module IP address parameters,
smart module certificate, NetEco certificate, NetEco second-challenge password, time
configuration parameters, access user management, access permission management, device
access certificate, log, and user configuration information.

Step 3 Label each cable and antenna based on the corresponding ports on the ECC800-
Pro main control module.
Step 4 Remove cables, USB flash drive, USB-to-WiFi module, and antennas from the
ECC800-Pro main control module.
Step 5 Loosen the screws on both sides of the ECC800-Pro main control module and pull
the handles on its both sides to remove it.

Figure 6-18 Removing the ECC800-Pro main control module

Step 6 (Optional) Remove the SIM card from the corresponding slot of the ECC800-Pro
main control module.
Step 7 (Optional) Install the removed SIM card in the corresponding slot of the new
ECC800-Pro main control module.

Figure 6-19 Installing a SIM card

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 300
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Step 8 Install the spare ECC800-Pro main control module in the ECC800-Pro subrack and
tighten the screws on both sides of the ECC800-Pro main control module.

Step 9 Connect the communications cables and antennas to the ECC800-Pro main control
module.

Step 10 Choose Maintenance > Configuration File and import the backup configuration
file, or set parameters for the devices that connect to the ECC800-Pro to ensure
normal communication.

----End

6.4.4.2 Replacing an ECC800-Pro Antenna

Prerequisites
● Tools: ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves
● Material: A spare ECC800-Pro antenna of the same model is available and
functional.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the 4G antenna.

Step 2 Install the spare 4G antenna in the original position and connect it to the ECC800-
Pro.

Figure 6-20 Replacing an antenna

----End

6.4.4.3 Replacing a SIM Card

Prerequisites
● Tools: ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves
● Materials: A spare SIM card of the same model is available and functional.

Procedure
Step 1 Record the positions of the signal cables connected to the panel of the ECC800-
Pro main control module, and then disconnect the signal cables.

Step 2 Loosen the screws on both sides of the panel of the ECC800-Pro main control
module.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 301
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Step 3 Pull the handles on both sides of the panel of the ECC800-Pro main control
module, and remove the module.

Figure 6-21 Removing the ECC800-Pro main control module

Step 4 Remove the SIM card from the card slot.

Figure 6-22 Removing a SIM card

Step 5 Insert the spare SIM card into the card slot.

Figure 6-23 Installing a SIM card

Step 6 Insert the ECC800-Pro main control module into the slot.
Step 7 Tighten the screws on both sides of the panel of the ECC800-Pro main control
module.
Step 8 Connect the signal cables to the panel of the new ECC800-Pro main control
module based on the recorded information.
----End

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 302
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

6.4.4.4 Replacing a Camera

Impact on the System

The operation of the video surveillance system will be interrupted.

Preparations
● Tools: ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves, step ladder, label, marker, insulated Phillips
screwdriver
● Material: camera

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the transparent cover using an insulated Phillips screwdriver.

Figure 6-24 Removing the transparent cover

Step 2 Remove the SD card.

Figure 6-25 Removing an SD card

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 303
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Step 3 Remove the monitoring network cable from the camera and remove the camera.

Figure 6-26 Removing the camera

Step 4 Install the new camera and SD card, reconnect the network cable, and secure the
camera to the base using screws.

Step 5 Commission the camera by referring to the ECC800-Pro user manual of the
appropriate version.

Step 6 Check that the camera functions properly.

----End

6.4.4.5 Replacing an IVS1800

Prerequisites
● Recommended tool: Phillips screwdriver
● An IVS1800 needs to be replaced.
● A spare IVS1800 of the same model is available and functional.

Context

NOTICE

Videos cannot be recorded during the replacement of the IVS1800.

DANGER

Do not operate with power on. Take appropriate insulation measures.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 304
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the power switch of the IVS1800, disconnect the power supply of the
IVS1800, remove the cables from the IVS1800, label the cables, and record the
original connection positions of the cables.

NOTICE

After removing cables, wrap exposed terminals with insulation tape and do not
block cable labels. If cable labels are blocked, cables may be connected incorrectly.

Step 2 Remove the faulty IVS1800 from the cabinet.

Step 3 Carry the device to the cabinet. Ensure that the mounting ears at both sides of the
device are tightly attached to the mounting bars in front of the cabinet. Use one
hand to hold the device. Use the other hand to thread M6 screws through the
slotted holes on the mounting ears. Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the M6
screws on the mounting ears. Each mounting ear uses two M6 screws.

Figure 6-27 Installing a device

Step 4 Reconnect the cables to the new IVS1800.

Step 5 Turn on the power switch of the IVS1800.

Step 6 Commissioning the IVS1800. If the video recording function works properly after
commissioning, the IVS1800 is functional.

----End

6.4.4.6 Replacing a Hard Disk for the IVS1800

Prerequisites
● A hard disk needs to be replaced.
● Data in the hard disk has been backed up.
● A spare hard disk of the same model is available and functional.
● Before replacing a faulty disk, ensure that the power switch on the rear panel
is off and disconnect the power cable to power off the device.

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 305
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Context
Recommended tools and materials: Phillips screwdriver, ESD wrist strap (or ESD
gloves).

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap (or ESD gloves) and insert the ground terminal into the
ESD jack in the cabinet.
Step 2 Remove the faulty hard disk.
1. Use a PH2 screwdriver to remove the two black screws on the rear of the
chassis cover, and take off the chassis cover.

Figure 6-28 Removing the chassis cover

2. Remove two black screws on each side of the chassis and the silvery white
one on top of the hard disk tray, raise the hard disk tray by 45 degrees, and
take out the upper and then lower layers of hard disk tray.

Figure 6-29 Removing the hard disk tray

Step 3 Install a new hard disk.

1. Place the hard disk with ports facing upwards and align the screw holes on
the hard disk tray with the hard disk and fasten the screws. Before the
installation, ensure that the fastener of the hard disk tray is on a different side
from the hard disk port, as shown in the lower left figure.

Figure 6-30 Installing hard disks

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 306
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

2. Insert the hard disk tray back at 45 degrees with the opening of its locking
buckle facing downwards, hold the screw in the red-framed part to lower the
hard disk tray until it is level, and fasten the black screws on the left and right
sides and the white screw on the top.

Figure 6-31 Fastening the screw on the panel and the screws on the hard disk
tray

3. Connect data and power cables to hard disks. Connect hard disk cable ports
0–3 to hard disks on the lower-layer hard disk tray and ports 4–7 to hard disks
on the upper-layer, as shown in the lower left figure.

Figure 6-32 Connecting data and power cables to hard disks

4. Close the chassis cover, and use a PH2 screwdriver to fasten the rear screws.

Figure 6-33 Closing the chassis cover

Step 4 Observe the hard disk indicator to check whether the hard disk works properly.

----End

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 307
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

Follow-up Procedure
If the new hard disk is not running properly, contact technical support.

6.4.4.7 Replacing a T/H Sensor (33010516)

Prerequisites
● A T/H sensor needs to be replaced.
● A spare T/H sensor of the same model is available and functional.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the cables from the T/H sensor.

Step 2 Remove the faulty T/H sensor.

Step 3 Attach the new T/H sensor to an appropriate position on the cabinet door frame
based on the site requirements.

Step 4 Reinstall the cable removed from the T/H sensor.

NOTE

Before removing a T/H sensor, remember the DIP switch setting on it. When you install a
new T/H sensor, you need to set the same DIP switch setting for the new one.

----End

6.4.4.8 Replacing a Smoke Detector

Prerequisites
● Recommended tools and materials: insulated Phillips screwdriver, insulation
tape, step ladder (2 m)
● A spare smoke detector of the same model is available and functional.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the faulty smoke detector from the base.

Step 2 Remove the cables from the smoke detector and apply insulation measures such
as wrapping the cables with insulation tape to avoid hazards.

Step 3 Install the new smoke detector and reconnect the cables to the new smoke
detector.

Step 4 Install the smoke detector on the base.

Step 5 Blow smoke toward the smoke detector using a smoke pistol until the smoke
detector indicator changes from blinking once every 6s to steady on. If a smoke
detector fire alarm is triggered, the smoke detector is functional.

----End

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 308
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 6 O&M

6.4.4.9 Replacing an Electrode Water Sensor

Prerequisites
● Recommended tools and materials: insulated Phillips screwdriver and
crimping tool
● The water sensor needs to be replaced.
● A spare water sensor of the same model is available and functional.

Procedure
Step 1 Disconnect the cable between the water sensor and ECC800-Pro.

Step 2 Remove the faulty water sensor.

Step 3 Place the new water sensor in the correct position.

Step 4 Connect it to the water sensor cable connected to the ECC800-Pro.

----End

6.4.4.10 Replacing a Door Status Sensor

Prerequisites
● Tools: Phillips screwdriver, insulation tape, step ladder
● Material: A spare door status sensor of the same model is available and
functional.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the cover from the door status sensor.

Step 2 Remove the communications cable using a Phillips screwdriver and insulate the
cable.

NOTICE

● When removing cables, label the cables with corresponding terminal ports for
later connection.
● When removing cables, wrap bare cables with insulation tape to avoid hazards.

Step 3 Remove the door status sensor from the conversion bracket on the cabinet door
using a screwdriver.

Step 4 Install the new door status sensor on the conversion bracket of the cabinet door,
and connect cables to the sensor.

Step 5 Reinstall the cover on the door status sensor.

----End

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 309
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 7 Technical Specifications

7 Technical Specifications

Table 7-1 Key technical specifications

Item Specifications

Cabinet dimensions (H x W x D) 2000 x 600 x 1100

(mm)

Power system Asia, Africa, and Europe: 220 V/230

V/240 V, 1 Ph, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Latin America: 208 V, 2 Ph, 60 Hz

Voltage range 220–240 V

Voltage frequency range 50 Hz/60 Hz (±3 Hz)

Maximum power of a single cabinet ≤ 3 kW

IP rating IP20

Altitude 0–4000 m (derated when the altitude

exceeds 1000 m)

Installation mode Installed on a concrete floor or an ESD

floor

Cable and pipe routing ● Pipes are routed from the top or
bottom.
● Input power cables of the cabinet can
be routed in from the top or bottom,
and other power cables can be routed
out from the top.
● Signal cables can be routed out from
the top or bottom.

Operating temperature Indoor: 0–40°C

Outdoor: –20°C to +45°C

Storage temperature –40°C to +70°C

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 310
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) 7 Technical Specifications

Item Specifications

Storage humidity ≤ 95% RH (non-condensing)

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 311
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) A Equipment Derating Coefficients

A Equipment Derating Coefficients

NOTE

The coefficients listed in the Table A-1 are based on the dry air density being 1.225 kg/m3
(sea level +15ºC).

Table A-1 Derating coefficients of the UPS2000-H

Altitude (Unit: m) Derating Coefficients

1000 1.0

1500 0.95

2000 0.91

2500 0.86

3000 0.82

3500 0.78

4000 0.74

4500 0.7

5000 0.67

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 312
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) B Acronyms and Abbreviations

B Acronyms and Abbreviations

A
AC alternate current
ATS Auto Transformer Switch
ATSE Auto Transformer Switch Equipment

B
BIM Battery Interface Module

C
CIM Communication Interface Module

D
DC direct current

I
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

M
MCB miniature circuit breaker

S
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SPD surge protective device
SOC State Of Charge
SOH State Of Health

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 313
FusionModule500 Smart Mini Data Center
User Manual (02116410, 02116411, 021164112) B Acronyms and Abbreviations

UPS uninterruptible power system

Issue 04 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 314